summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/macros/text1/cms_help_files
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900
committerNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900
commite0c6872cf40896c7be36b11dcc744620f10adf1d (patch)
tree60335e10d2f4354b0674ec22d7b53f0f8abee672 /macros/text1/cms_help_files
Initial commit
Diffstat (limited to 'macros/text1/cms_help_files')
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--footn.help4--f20
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--verti.helpvert21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/10noter.helpfoot14
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/11noter.helpfoot23
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/12noter.helpfoot16
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/1block.helpbloc19
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/1every.helpfoot21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everye.helpendn21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everyf.helpfoot21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/1numbe.helpsubh13
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/1number.helpsubh13
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--footn.help4--f15
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--verti.helpvert15
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/2block.helpbloc16
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footn.helpfoot21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footno.helpfoot21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/2skipbe.helpendn21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/2title.helpsubh20
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/3befor.helpfoot21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/3block.helpmenu14
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/3every.helpbloc21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incon.helpsubh15
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incont.helpsubh15
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipb.helpfoot22
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipbe.helpfoot22
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/3textre.helpendn17
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/4footn.helpmenu18
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/4refer.helpfoot16
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipaf.helpfoot22
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipb.helpbloc17
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/4textre.helpendn14
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/5refer.helpfoot16
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/5skipa.helpbloc18
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpendn23
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpfoot17
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/6notere.helpendn17
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/6refer.helpfoot14
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/6textre.helpfoot17
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/7notere.helpendn14
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/7refer.helpfoot21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/7textre.helpfoot14
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/8notere.helpendn23
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/8textre.helpfoot23
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpendn16
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpfoot17
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/aen.helpmark72
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/afn.helpmark58
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/aib.helpmark84
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/aie.helpmark37
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/aif.helpmark76
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumbe.helpsubh13
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumber.helpsubh13
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/apf.helpmark93
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/app.helpmark30
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpmenu103
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/asism.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/asisp.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bd.helpmark48
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bi.helpmark36
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bib.helpmark43
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibentry.helpmark57
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliog.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliogr.helpmark54
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bie.helpmark51
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bif.helpmark248
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bothpage.helpmenu12
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomma.helppage21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpboth28
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpeven28
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpoddp28
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqb.helpmark61
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqe.helpmark47
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqf.helpmark76
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotem.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotep.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/break.helpmark36
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitle.helpsubh20
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitlef.helpsubh18
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/bul.helpmark44
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/cc.helpmark33
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/cents.helpmark23
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/chap.helpmark48
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/chapter.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/chf.helpmark98
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/chrono.changes3
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincon.helpsubh15
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincont.helpsubh15
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/cl.helpmark38
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/clb.helpmark68
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/cle.helpmark38
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/contents.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/coul.helpmark21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/db.helpmark45
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbm.helpmark26
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbrs.helpmark27
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/die.helpmark32
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/dsp.helpmark41
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/el.helpmark44
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/enf.helpmark129
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotem.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotep.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/ep.helpmark38
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/epm.helpmark24
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/ex.helpmark26
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/fif.helpmark86
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/fig.helpmark110
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurem.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurep.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/fixf.helpmark34
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnf.helpmark139
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotem.helpbloc8
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotep.helpbloc8
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/font.helpmark51
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontm.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontp.helpbloc8
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/footnote.helpmark63
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/frac.helpmark52
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/frenchsp.helpmark53
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/goodbrea.helpmark33
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/halign.helpmark177
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/hbox.helpmark36
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/hin.helpmark48
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/hof.helpmark54
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/hon.helpmark54
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/hp.helpmark48
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/hrule.helpmark44
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/hs.helpmark47
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/hsize.helpmark49
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/incl.helpmark89
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/indent.helpmark41
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/index.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/input.helpmark46
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/isk.helpmark46
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/it.helpmark41
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/italicfa.helpmark21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/item.helpmark45
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/ix.helpmark311
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/ixf.helpmark260
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/ju.helpmark42
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/la.helpmark44
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/label.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/laf.helpmark120
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/lbr.helpmark45
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/leader.helpmark47
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/letter.helpmode7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/lib.helpmark50
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/lie.helpmark39
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/lif.helpmark128
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/lil.helpmark43
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/lin.helpmark69
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/line.helpmark56
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/lint.helpmark25
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/lir.helpmark46
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/lists.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/lnf.helpmark24
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/lr.helpmark44
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/markup.helpmenu176
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/marnote.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/mathdefa.helpmark24
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/mcf.helpmark260
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/memo.helpmode7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/mi.helpmark31
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/mn.helpmark30
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/mnf.helpmark53
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/msp.helpmark91
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/multicol.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/nc.helpmark49
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/nin.helpmark46
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/nobreak.helpmark39
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/nonfrenc.helpmark45
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/np.helpmark36
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/ntp.helpmark47
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/numl.helpmark20
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/oc.helpmark52
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/opm.helpmark24
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/paf.helpmark67
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagem.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagep.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/paper.helpmode7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/par.helpmark81
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/parm.helpbloc8
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/parp.helpbloc8
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpmark32
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/pb.helpmark47
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/pen.helpmark42
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/pf.helpmark83
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/pic.helpmark97
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/pin.helpmark46
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/plaintex.helpmark28
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/pn.helpmark40
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/ppl.helpmark21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/pre.helpmark31
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/preface.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/prf.helpmark42
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/prin.helpmark20
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/printend.helpmark10
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/printind.helpmark58
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/psk.helpmark62
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/qquad.helpmark39
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/quad.helpmark40
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/raggedbo.helpmark16
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/resume.helpmode7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/rff.helpmark129
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/rhf.helpmark115
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/rin.helpmark79
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/rl.helpmark29
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/rlb.helpmark35
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/rle.helpmark28
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/rm.helpmark41
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/rr.helpmark47
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/rule.helpmark48
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/runfoot.helpbloc8
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/runhead.helpbloc8
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/san.helpmark25
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/sau.helpmark44
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/scn.helpmark25
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/senn.helpmark37
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/settabs.helpmark151
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfn.helpmark37
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfnn.helpmark39
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfs.helpmark79
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/sha.helpmark40
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/shaf.helpmark85
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/shb.helpmark40
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/shbf.helpmark86
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/shc.helpmark39
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/shcf.helpmark81
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/shd.helpmark33
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/shdf.helpmark77
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/sms.helpmark50
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/special.helpmark24
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/spn.helpmark46
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/sptn.helpmark23
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssan.helpmark25
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssbn.helpmark25
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/sscn.helpmark25
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssdn.helpmark25
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssf.helpmark50
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssp.helpmark43
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/stn.helpmark37
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/strut.helpmark82
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheada.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadb.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadc.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadd.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/sy.helpmark26
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablem.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablep.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/taf.helpmark56
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/talaris.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/tat.helpmark59
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/tenpt.helpmark42
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/text1.helpmark44
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/thc.helpmark75
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/thesis.helpmode8
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/titlepg.helpbloc7
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/toc.helpmark39
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/tocf.helpmark478
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/toclbr.helpmark43
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/today.helpmark30
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpeven31
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpoddp31
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/topmargi.helppage21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/tp.helpmark44
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/tpf.helpmark50
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/tt.helpmark50
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/twc.helpmark75
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/twelvept.helpmark44
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/us.helpmark34
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/vbox.helpmark32
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/vertical.helpvert21
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/vrule.helpmark19
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/vs.helpmark53
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/vsk.helpmark45
-rw-r--r--macros/text1/cms_help_files/width.helppage13
277 files changed, 11688 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--footn.help4--f b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--footn.help4--f
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fc45137071
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--footn.help4--f
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \footnotestyle COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \footnotestyle command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the numbering style for the
+footnotes. The format for the \footnotestyle command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \footnotestyle{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is one of four possible values:
+
+ 1 which gives numbered footnotes 1, 2, 3, etc.
+ (1) which gives numbered footnotes included in parentheses (1), (2)
+ a which gives lettered footnotes a, b, c, etc.
+ (a) which gives lettered footnotes enclosed in parentheses (a), (b)
+
+The \footnotestyle default is \footnotestyle{(1)}
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--verti.helpvert b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--verti.helpvert
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..872fadaa4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--verti.helpvert
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \verticalspace (\vs) COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \verticalspace (\vs) command will leave the specified amount of space or
+the specified number of blank lines in the text. This command will also force
+the following text into a new paragraph. The format for the \verticalspace
+(\vs) command is:
+
+ \verticalspace{x}
+
+Where "x" is the number of blank lines or space you wish to leave. For
+example,
+
+ \verticalspace{4\bl}
+
+will leave four blank lines, and
+
+ \verticalspace{2in}
+
+will leave two inches of blank space.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/10noter.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/10noter.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a67f3982ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/10noter.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \notereferencefont COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \notereferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the font in which the
+footnote reference numbers in the text of the notes are printed. The format
+for the \notereferencefont command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \notereferencefont{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/11noter.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/11noter.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8b39bf09ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/11noter.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \notereferencestyle COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \notereferencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the style in which the
+footnote reference numbers within the notes are printed. There are six
+possible note numbering styles:
+ \notereferencestyle{1} for numbered footnotes "1, 2, 3, ..."
+ \notereferencestyle{1.} for numbered footnotes "1., 2., 3., ..."
+ \notereferencestyle{(1)} for numbered footnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..."
+ \notereferencestyle{a} for lettered footnotes "a, b, c, ..."
+ \notereferencestyle{a.} for lettered footnotes "a., b., c., ..."
+ \notereferencestyle{(a)} for lettered footnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..."
+
+The format for the \notereferencestyle command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \notereferencestyle{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is one of the six valid style designations given above. The default
+is \notereferencestyle{1}.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/12noter.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/12noter.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c74fb65186
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/12noter.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \notereferencegutter COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \notereferencegutter command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the amount of space between
+the footnote reference number and the text of the footnotes. The format for
+the \notereferencegutter command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \notereferencegutter{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is any number and valid TeX measurement (in, pc, pts, etc.).
+\notereferencegutter{1em} is the default and will give one emspace between the
+footnote reference numbers and the text of the notes.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1block.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1block.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e0c19a24b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1block.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \blockquotebegin (\bqb) COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \blockquotebegin (\bqb) command will begin a new paragraph and indent the
+following text the amount of the current paragraph indentation on both the left
+and right margins. If the current paragraph indentation value is zero, the
+indentation for the block quote will be one-half inch. The format for the
+\blockquotebegin (\bqb) command is:
+
+ \blockquotebegin
+ tttttt
+ tttttt
+ tttttt
+ \blockquoteend
+
+Where the "tttttt" designates the text included as the block quote. The
+\blockquotebegin (\bqb) command is always used in conjunction with the
+\blockquoteend (\bqe) command.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1every.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1every.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..af55b6bbd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1every.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \everyfootnote COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \everyfootnote command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set options for the paragraph format
+within the footnote. The format for the \fortmatfootnote command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \everyfootnote{options
+ }}
+
+Where "options" is one or more of the following.
+
+ \paragraphindent \paragraphskip \leftindent
+ \rightindent \rightragged \interlineskip
+ \singlespace \doublespace font changes
+ \justify
+
+For more information on any of these options see the help screen under the
+markup menu for that particular command.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everye.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everye.helpendn
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..de87d7cf5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everye.helpendn
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \everyendnote COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \everyendnote command is always used in conjunction with the \endnoteformat
+(\enf) command, and will set options for the paragraph format within the
+endnote. The format for the \everyendnote command is:
+
+ \endnoteformat{
+ \everyendnote{options
+ }}
+
+Where "options" is one or more of the following.
+
+ \paragraphindent \paragraphskip \leftindent
+ \rightindent \rightragged \interlineskip
+ \singlespace \doublespace font changes
+ \justify
+
+For more information on any of these options see the help screen under the
+markup menu for that particular command.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everyf.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everyf.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ecd02acc90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everyf.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \everyfootnote COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \everyfootnote command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set options for the paragraph format
+within the footnote. The format for the \everyfootnote command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \everyfootnote{options
+ }}
+
+Where "options" is one or more of the following.
+
+ \paragraphindent \paragraphskip \leftindent
+ \rightindent \rightragged \interlineskip
+ \singlespace \doublespace font changes
+ \justify
+
+For more information on any of these options see the help screen under the
+markup menu for that particular command.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1numbe.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1numbe.helpsubh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9ba197b3e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1numbe.helpsubh
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \numberingstyle COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \numberingstyle command is always used in conjunction with the
+\subheadbformat command and will set the style of numbering for the subheadb
+titles. The format for the \numberingstyle command is:
+
+ \subheadbformat{\numberingstyle{xxx}
+ }
+
+where "xxx" is A, 1, or I. The default \numberingstyle for subheadb is
+\numberingstyle{1}.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1number.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1number.helpsubh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9f2fe89806
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1number.helpsubh
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \numberingstyle COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \numberingstyle command is always used in conjunction with the
+\subheadaformat command and will set the style of numbering for the subheada
+titles. The format for the \numberingstyle command is:
+
+ \subheadaformat{\numberingstyle{xxx}
+ }
+
+where "xxx" is A, 1, or I. The default \numberingstyle for subheada is
+\numberingstyle{1}.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--footn.help4--f b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--footn.help4--f
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..24d6dbb6ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--footn.help4--f
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \footnotereferencefont COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \footnotereferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnotereferenceformat command, and establishes what font will be used to set
+the footnote reference numbers. The format for the \footnotereferencefont
+command is:
+
+ \footnotereferenceformat{
+ \footnotereferencefont{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is a valid font style (\sf, \bf, \it, etc.). The default footnote
+reference font is the standardface font.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--verti.helpvert b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--verti.helpvert
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7b10e91285
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--verti.helpvert
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \verticalspacekeep (\vsk) COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \verticalspacekeep (\vsk) command will leave vertical space at the
+beginning of a page or for a figure, plate, table, or any other reason when you
+need to have the entire space specified kept intact. If the specified space
+will not fit on the current page, it will be printed at the top of the
+following page and the remaining current page will remain blank, causing you to
+receive an underfull vbox warning. The \verticalspacekeep (\vsk) format is:
+
+ \verticalspacekeep{xx}
+
+Where "xx" is the amount of vertical space expressed in any valid TeX
+measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.) or in number of lines to be left for the figure.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2block.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2block.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2e72dd23cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2block.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \blockquoteend (\bqe) COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \blockquoteend (\bqe) command ends a block quote and starts a new
+paragraph. The format for the \blockquoteend (\bqe) command is:
+
+ \blockquotebegin
+ tttttt
+ tttttt
+ tttttt
+ \blockquoteend
+
+Where the "tttttt" designates the text included as the block quote. The
+\blockquoteend (\bqe) command is always used in conjunction with the
+\blockquotebegin (\bqb) command.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footn.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footn.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f20d126e79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footn.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \footnotedivider COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \footnotedivider command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the length for the line that
+divides the page text from the beginning of the footnote text. The format for
+the \footnotedivider command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \footnotedivider{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). For example,
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \footnotedivider{1.5in}
+ }
+
+would make the horizontal rule before the footnote text to be one and one-half
+inches long.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footno.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footno.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f20d126e79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footno.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \footnotedivider COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \footnotedivider command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the length for the line that
+divides the page text from the beginning of the footnote text. The format for
+the \footnotedivider command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \footnotedivider{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). For example,
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \footnotedivider{1.5in}
+ }
+
+would make the horizontal rule before the footnote text to be one and one-half
+inches long.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2skipbe.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2skipbe.helpendn
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2f7d5f5372
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2skipbe.helpendn
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \skipbefore COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \skipbefore command is always used in conjunction with the \endnoteformat
+(\enf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space before the endnotes
+are printed. The format for the \skipbefore command is:
+
+ \endnoteformat{
+ \skipbefore{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is expressed in \baselines or any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in,
+etc.). For example,
+
+ \endnoteformat{
+ \skipbefore{1.5in}
+ }
+
+would put one and one-half inches of vertical space before the beginning of the
+endnote text.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2title.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2title.helpsubh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..98cab4d1b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2title.helpsubh
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \titleformat COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \titleformat command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadbformat
+command and will set options for the subheadb titles. The format for the
+\titleformat command is:
+
+ \subheadbformat{\titleformat{
+ \vsk{24pt}
+ {\it \subheadbtitle}
+ \vs{12pt}}
+ }
+
+This is the default for \titleformat. Each \subheadb command will space down 24
+points, print the \subheadbtitle in italics and space down 12 points to resume
+with the text.
+
+For more information on the \subheadbtitle command, see the help screen under
+the markup menu for that particular command.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3befor.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3befor.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..98eb00954f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3befor.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \beforefootnoteskip COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \beforefootnoteskip command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space
+between the page text and the footnote divider. The format for the
+\beforefootnoteskip command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \beforefootnoteskip{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). For example,
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \beforefootnoteskip{1.5in}
+ }
+
+would put one and one-half inches of vertical space between the page text and
+the footnote dividing rule.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3block.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3block.helpmenu
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b8517f05b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3block.helpmenu
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+ Menu for BLOCKQUOTEFORMAT -- TEXT1
+
+A file may be selected for viewing by placing the cursor under any character
+of the file wanted and pressing the PF 1 key. A MENU file is indicated when
+a name is preceded by an asterisk (*). If you are using a terminal that
+doesn't have a CURSOR or PF KEYS then you MUST TYPE in the COMPLETE HELP
+COMMAND with operands and options. For a description of the operands and
+options type HELP HELP.
+
+
+skipafter (space after block quotes)
+skipbefore (space before block quotes)
+blockquoteparagraphformat (establishing paragraph options
+ within block quotes)
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3every.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3every.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7a2445ec78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3every.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \everyblockquote COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \everyblockquote command is always used in conjunction with the
+\blockquoteformat (\bqf) command, and will set options for the paragraph format
+within the blockquote. The format for the \everyblockquote command is:
+
+ \blockquoteformat{
+ \everyblockquote{options
+ }}
+
+Where "options" is one or more of the following.
+
+ \paragraphindent \paragraphskip \interlineskip
+ \justify \rightragged font changes
+ \singlespace \doublespace \leftindent
+ \rightindent
+
+For more information on any of these options see the help screen under the
+markup menu for that particular command.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incon.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incon.helpsubh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e58c80f034
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incon.helpsubh
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \incontents COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \incontents command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadbformat
+command and will determine whether subheadb titles are included in the Table of
+Contents. The format for the \incontents command is:
+
+ \subheadbformat{
+ \incontents{yes}
+ }
+
+By default, the subheadb titles will not be included in the Table of Contents.
+If you want the subheadb titles included in the Table of Contents, enter
+\incontents{yes} within the \subheadbformat command.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incont.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incont.helpsubh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b5f4b3d717
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incont.helpsubh
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \incontents COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \incontents command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadaformat
+command and will determine whether subheada titles are included in the Table of
+Contents. The format for the \incontents command is:
+
+ \subheadaformat{
+ \incontents{yes}
+ }
+
+By default, the subheada titles will be included in the Table of Contents. If
+you do not want the subheada titles included in the Table of Contents, enter
+\incontents{no} within the \subheadaformat command.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipb.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipb.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bc6ebaf65d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipb.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \skipbeforedivider COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \skipbeforedivider command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space
+between the page text and the footnote divider. The format for the
+\skipbeforedivider command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \skipbeforedivider{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is expressed in \baselines or any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in,
+etc.). For example,
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \skipbeforedivider{1.5in}
+ }
+
+would put one and one-half inches of vertical space between the page text and
+the footnote dividing rule.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipbe.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipbe.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bc6ebaf65d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipbe.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \skipbeforedivider COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \skipbeforedivider command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space
+between the page text and the footnote divider. The format for the
+\skipbeforedivider command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \skipbeforedivider{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is expressed in \baselines or any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in,
+etc.). For example,
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \skipbeforedivider{1.5in}
+ }
+
+would put one and one-half inches of vertical space between the page text and
+the footnote dividing rule.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3textre.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3textre.helpendn
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2649fb0153
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3textre.helpendn
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \textreferenceposition COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \textreferenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the
+\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine whether the endnote reference
+number within the text is a superscript number or not. The format for the
+\textreferenceposition command is:
+
+ \endnoteformat{
+ \textreferenceposition{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \textreferenceposition{up} will give
+superscript numbers for the endnote reference numbers within the text.
+\textreferenceposition{down} will give print the endnote reference numbers
+within the text on the baseline.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4footn.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4footn.helpmenu
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e0ab64ea02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4footn.helpmenu
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+ Menu for FOOTNOTEREFERENCEFORMAT Commands -- TEXT1
+
+A file may be selected for viewing by placing the cursor under any character
+of the file wanted and pressing the PF 1 key. A MENU file is indicated when
+a name is preceded by an asterisk (*). If you are using a terminal that
+doesn't have a CURSOR or PF KEYS then you MUST TYPE in the COMPLETE HELP
+COMMAND with operands and options. For a description of the operands and
+options type HELP HELP.
+
+
+1--footnotestyle (the numbering style of the footnotes)
+2--footnotereferencefont (the font used to set footnote
+ reference numbers)
+3--precede (positioning of the footnote reference number before word)
+4--follow (positioning the footnote reference number after the word)
+5--superscript (superscript footnote reference numbers)
+6--notsuperscript (footnote reference numbers not superscript)
+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4refer.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4refer.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..08e7cd3e11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4refer.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \referenceposition COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \referenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote
+reference number is a superscript number or not. The format for the
+\referenceposition command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \referenceposition{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \referenceposition{up} will give
+superscript numbers for the footnote reference numbers.
+\referenceposition{down} will give regular-sized footnote reference numbers.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipaf.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipaf.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ba168c90f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipaf.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \skipafterdivider COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \skipafterdivider command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space
+between the footnote divider and the beginning of the text of the first
+footnote. The format for the \skipafterdivider command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \skipafterdivider{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is expressed in \baselines or any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in,
+etc.). For example,
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \skipafterdivider{5pt}
+ }
+
+would put five points of vertical space between the the footnote dividing rule
+and the text of the first footnote.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipb.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipb.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c1430e9b33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipb.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \skipbefore COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \skipbefore command is always used in conjunction with the
+\blockquoteformat (\bqf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space
+that is to be skipped before the blockquote begins. The format for the
+\skipbefore command is:
+
+ \blockquoteformat{
+ \skipbefore{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is the amount of space desired, expressed in number of lines or any
+legal TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). The amount of space indicated in the
+\skipbefore command will be added to the current paragraph skip before
+beginning the first paragraph of the blockquote.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4textre.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4textre.helpendn
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f80277833c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4textre.helpendn
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \textreferencefont COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \textreferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the
+\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the font in which the endnote
+reference numbers in the text are printed. The format for the
+\textreferencefont command is:
+
+ \endnoteformat{
+ \textreferencefont{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5refer.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5refer.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5f70c16e4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5refer.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \referenceplacement COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \referenceplacement command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote
+reference number is placed before or after the footnote reference word. The
+format for the \referenceplacement command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \referenceplacement{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is either "before" or "after". \referenceplacement{after} will
+place the footnote reference number after the word. \referenceplacement{before}
+will place the footnote reference number before the word referenced.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5skipa.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5skipa.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3a4794e3a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5skipa.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \skipafter COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \skipafter command is always used in conjunction with the \blockquoteformat
+(\bqf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space that is to be skipped
+after the last paragraph of the blockquote ends. The format for the \skipafter
+command is:
+
+ \blockquoteformat{
+ \skipafter{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is the amount of space desired, expressed in number of lines or any
+legal TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). The amount of space indicated in the
+\skipafter command will be added to the current paragraph skip after ending the
+last paragraph of the blockquote and before beginning the next paragraph of the
+regular text.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpendn
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..96e3aab143
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpendn
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \textreferencestyle COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \textreferencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the
+\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the style in which the
+endnote reference numbers within the text are printed. There are six possible
+text numbering styles:
+ \textreferencestyle{1} for numbered endnotes "1, 2, 3, ..."
+ \textreferencestyle{[1]} for numbered endnotes "[1], [2], ..."
+ \textreferencestyle{(1)} for numbered endnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..."
+ \textreferencestyle{a} for lettered endnotes "a, b, c, ..."
+ \textreferencestyle{[a]} for lettered endnotes "[a], [b] ..."
+ \textreferencestyle{(a)} for lettered endnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..."
+
+The format for the \textreferencestyle command is:
+
+ \endnoteformat{
+ \textreferencestyle{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is one of the six valid style designations given above. The default
+is \textreferencestyle{[1]}.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..518c8f518d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \textreferenceposition COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \textreferenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote
+reference number within the text is a superscript number or not. The format
+for the \textreferenceposition command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \textreferenceposition{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \textreferenceposition{up} will give
+superscript numbers for the footnote reference numbers within the text.
+\textreferenceposition{down} will give print the footnote reference numbers
+within the text on the baseline.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6notere.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6notere.helpendn
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1c6002625d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6notere.helpendn
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \notereferenceposition COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \notereferenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the
+\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine whether the endnote reference
+number within the text of the endnotes is a superscript number or not. The
+format for the \notereferenceposition command is:
+
+ \endnoteformat{
+ \notereferenceposition{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \notereferenceposition{up} will give
+superscript numbers for the endnote reference numbers in the notes.
+\notereferenceposition{down} will give print the endnote reference numbers in
+the notes on the baseline.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6refer.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6refer.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..55dda0ef13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6refer.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \referencefont COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \referencefont command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the font in which the
+footnote reference numbers are printed. The format for the \referencefont
+command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \referencefont{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6textre.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6textre.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..79eb463bae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6textre.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \textreferenceplacement COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \textreferenceplacement command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote
+reference number within the text is placed before or after the footnote
+reference word. The format for the \textreferenceplacement command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \textreferenceplacement{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is either "before" or "after". \textreferenceplacement{after} will
+place the footnote reference number after the word in the text.
+\textreferenceplacement{before} will place the footnote reference number before
+the referenced word in the text.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7notere.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7notere.helpendn
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8b29d46327
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7notere.helpendn
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \notereferencefont COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \notereferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the
+\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the font in which the endnote
+reference numbers in the text of the notes are printed. The format for the
+\notereferencefont command is:
+
+ \endnoteformat{
+ \notereferencefont{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7refer.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7refer.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a3d8622991
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7refer.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \referencestyle COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \referencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the style in which the
+footnote reference numbers are printed. There are four possible numbering
+styles:
+ \referencestyle{1} for numbered footnotes "1, 2, 3, ..."
+ \referencestyle{(1)} for numbered footnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..."
+ \referencestyle{a} for lettered footnotes "a, b, c, ..."
+ \referencestyle{(a)} for lettered footnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..."
+
+The format for the \referencestyle command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \referencestyle{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is one of the four valid style designations given above. The
+default is \referencestyle{(1)}.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7textre.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7textre.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b827caaa77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7textre.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \textreferencefont COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \textreferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the font in which the
+footnote reference numbers in the text are printed. The format for the
+\textreferencefont command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \textreferencefont{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8notere.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8notere.helpendn
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0728adcc36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8notere.helpendn
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \notereferencestyle COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \notereferencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the
+\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the style in which the
+endnote reference numbers within the notes are printed. There are six possible
+note numbering styles:
+ \notereferencestyle{1} for numbered endnotes "1, 2, 3, ..."
+ \notereferencestyle{[1]} for numbered endnotes "[1], [2] ..."
+ \notereferencestyle{(1)} for numbered endnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..."
+ \notereferencestyle{a} for lettered endnotes "a, b, c, ..."
+ \notereferencestyle{[a]} for lettered endnotes "[a], [b] ..."
+ \notereferencestyle{(a)} for lettered endnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..."
+
+The format for the \notereferencestyle command is:
+
+ \endnoteformat{
+ \notereferencestyle{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is one of the six valid style designations given above. The default
+is \notereferencestyle{1}.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8textre.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8textre.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5cef5c7d45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8textre.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \textreferencestyle COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \textreferencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the style in which the
+footnote reference numbers within the text are printed. There are six possible
+text numbering styles:
+ \textreferencestyle{1} for numbered footnotes "1, 2, 3, ..."
+ \textreferencestyle{1.} for numbered footnotes "1., 2., 3., ..."
+ \textreferencestyle{(1)} for numbered footnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..."
+ \textreferencestyle{a} for lettered footnotes "a, b, c, ..."
+ \textreferencestyle{a.} for lettered footnotes "a., b., c., ..."
+ \textreferencestyle{(a)} for lettered footnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..."
+
+The format for the \textreferencestyle command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \textreferencestyle{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is one of the six valid style designations given above. The default
+is \textreferencestyle{1}.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpendn
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1c9007ef54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpendn
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \notereferencegutter COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \notereferencegutter command is always used in conjunction with the
+\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the amount of space between
+the endnote reference number and the text of the endnotes. The format for the
+\notereferencegutter command is:
+
+ \endnoteformat{
+ \notereferencegutter{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is any number and valid TeX measurement (in, pc, pts, etc.).
+\notereferencegutter{1em} is the default and will give one emspace between the
+endnote reference numbers and the text of the notes.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpfoot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..beddf74b27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpfoot
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \notereferenceposition COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \notereferenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the
+\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote
+reference number within the text of the footnotes is a superscript number or
+not. The format for the \notereferenceposition command is:
+
+ \footnoteformat{
+ \notereferenceposition{xx}
+ }
+
+Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \notereferenceposition{up} will give
+superscript numbers for the footnote reference numbers in the notes.
+\notereferenceposition{down} will give print the footnote reference numbers in
+the notes on the baseline.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aen.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aen.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..00b597ddac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aen.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+ HELPMARK D1
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| autoendnote |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\aenã%
+
+Parameters: ã|textã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \autoendnote markup adds notes to the end of a document or the end
+of a chapter. It has one parameter, the text of the endnote, which it
+places in working storage to be printed when called by \printendnotes. An
+endnote reference number is placed in the text where the markup occurred.
+By default this reference number is surrounded by square brackets. The
+endnote number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of
+\autoendnote.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+There is a well-marked division of
+labor.\autoendnote{Such as it is. Things could be
+different in the geological world, but they are not.}
+Details of organization have evolved by an
+optimization . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| There is a well-marked division of labor.[1] Details of organization |
+| have evolved by an optimization . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The endnote printed following the next \printendnotes markup would look
+like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 1. Such as it is. Things could be different in the geological world, but |
+| they are not. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+You cannot use \autoendnote within \settabs, \vbox, \hbox, \asisbegin,
+\drawbox, \paragraphbox, \label, \part, \chapter, \centerline, \halign,
+\rightlinesbegin, or \centerlinesbegin.
+ The endnote number is reset to 1 at the beginning of each part. To
+reset the endnote number outside of a \part, use the \setendnotenumber
+markup.
+ Use the \endnoteformat markup to change the \autoendnote style.
+ There are occasions when you need to include a very long endnote. If
+the endnote exceeds 2,048 characters in length, you will need to split the
+note into two parts as follows. First, at the beginning of your document
+you will need to include a special definition for a new markup. You may
+give it any name you choose. For this example, we'll define a markup called
+\continue. Enter these three lines at the top of the document:
+
+\catcode'*=11
+\let\continue=\en*w
+\catcode'*=12
+
+Next, break the endnote into paragraphs of not more than 2,048 characters
+each. In the source below, the sentence beginning "First paragraph" is
+the first paragraph with not more than 2,048 characters, and the second
+paragraph beginning "Second paragraph" is the last paragraph of the endnote.
+
+line containt the note.\autoendnote{First paragraph
+of a very long endnote . . . }
+\continue{Second paragraph of the long endnote,
+which will print in the \printendnotes after
+the first paragraph}
+Sentence following the word "note."
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/afn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/afn.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0e764aa0b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/afn.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| autofootnote |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\afnã%
+
+Parameters: ã|textã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \autofootnote markup adds footnotes to a page. The footnote can be
+placed anywhere within text, without interrupting formatting. When the
+document is formatted, the place of the footnote is marked with a number.
+The text of the note is put at the bottom of the page. The footnote number
+will be automatically incremented by one for each use of \autofootnote.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+communicate most important things --- hunger, alarm,
+rank, and sexual desire --- among themselves by
+means of nonsyntactical signals.\autofootnote{such
+as crashing together} Individuals are aware of
+members and nonmembers of their group.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| communicate most important things --- hunger, alarm, rank, and sexual |
+| desire --- among themselves by means of nonsyntactical signals.(1) |
+| Individuals are aware of members and nonmembers of their group. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The footnote would print as follows at the bottom of the page:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| 1. such as crashing together |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The text of the note must be enclosed with curly braces, otherwise following
+text will be taken as footnote text, until all available space for footnotes
+is exhausted.
+ You cannot use \autofootnote within \settabs, \vbox, \hbox,
+\drawbox, \paragraphbox, \label, \part, \chapter, \centerline, \halign,
+\rightlinesbegin, or \centerlinesbegin.
+ The footnote number is reset to 1 at the beginning of each part. To
+reset the footnote number outside of a \part, use the \setfootnotenumber
+markup.
+ To change the footnote style, use the \footnoteformat markup.
+ When using \monospace, the footnote in the text of the document is
+surrounded by parenthesis, instead of superscripted. The previous \auto-
+footnote sample output would print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| communicate most important things --- hunger, alarm, rank, and sexual |
+| desire --- among themselves by means of nonsyntactical signals.(1) |
+| Individuals are aware of members and nonmembers of their group. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aib.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aib.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dc70ed9c37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aib.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| asisbegin |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\aibã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \asisbegin markup forces the following text into an unformatted block.
+Each line is printed as it was entered. Line breaks and interword spacing
+are honored. TEXT1 markup within an "as is" sequence is limited to
+\verticalspace, \verticalspacekeep, \autofootnote, and font changes.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\monospace
+
+\centerline{Elements of the Spheres}
+
+\vs{12pt}
+\asisbegin
+Element Anthrosphere Lithosphere
+Oxygen 62.10 60.60
+Hydrogen 01.10 00.10
+Sodium 00.001 00.400
+\asisend
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Elements of the Spheres |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| Element Anthrosphere Lithosphere |
+| Oxygen 62.10 60.60 |
+| Hydrogen 01.10 00.10 |
+| Sodium 00.001 00.400 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The columns will only line up if you are using \monospace or \typewriter.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you use accents while in \asisbegin, you must surround the accented
+letter with curly braces.
+
+lowest common denominator.
+\vs{12pt}
+\centerline{\bd Outline}
+\aib
+\vs{6pt}
+The Morality of Rock in the Fossil Record
+ Elementary Concepts: Toasting the \c{C}rust
+ Principles of Population Geology
+\aie
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+| lowest common denominator. |
+| |
+| |
+| Outline |
+| |
+| The Morality of Rock in the Fossil Record |
+| Elementary Concepts: Toasting the Crust |
+| Principles of Population Geology |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+With the monospaced font you can use the "as is" sequence to have TEXT1
+obey precisely your text placement, including space between words. With
+proportionally spaced fonts only the lead blanks would line up; blanks
+"inside" the text would be different widths (depending on the width of
+previous characters).
+
+ Font changes within an \asisbegin may change the horizontal spacing.
+ Every \asisbegin must have a matching \asisend.
+ You cannot use \asisbegin within any of the following markup: \appen-
+dix, \autofootnote, \bibliography, \centerline, \chapter, \drawbox, \figure,
+\footnote, \item, \label, \marginnote, \paragraphbox, \part, \preface,
+\rightline, \runningheadformat, \runningfootformat, \subheada, \subheadb,
+\subheadc, \subheadd, or \tabletitle.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aie.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aie.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3fd9d98509
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aie.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| asisend |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\aieã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \asisend markup ends an "as is" series.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\aib
+ This fortress built by Nature for herself
+ Against infection and the hand of war,
+ (Richard II)
+\aie
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| This fortress built by Nature for herself |
+| Against infection and the hand of war, |
+| (Richard II) |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Each \asisend must have a matching \asisbegin. Omitting the ending \asisend
+will produce the following error message:
+
+(\end occurred inside a group at level 2)
+Output written on TEXT1$$.dvi (1 page, 436 bytes).
+Transcript written on TEXT1$$.texlog.
+
+See \asisformat to modify the defaults for \asisbegin and
+\asisbegin.
+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aif.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aif.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..17657f596f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aif.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| asisformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\aifã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \everyasis, \skipafterã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \asisformat markup allows you to modify the "as is" block. The "as is"
+markup skips 1 blank line (a baseline) before and after the series. There
+is no indentation from the left.
+
+\skipbefore indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a
+block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. The default skip
+is 6pt. If you are using \monospace, the default skip is 1\bl.
+
+\everyasis{Nested Markup} determines how the 'as is' text is printed. This
+submarkup is only valid within the asisformat markup. Spacing and font
+changes are allowed, but not justification, right indentation, or other
+paragraph information.
+
+\skipafter indicates how much space is to be skipped after printing a
+block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. The default skip
+is 6pt. If you are using \monospace, the default skip is 1\bl.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+In this example, the "as is" text is to be indented 7 picas from the left
+margin, the text is to be printed in ten point typewriter, and 4 points
+skipped before and after.
+
+\asisformat{\skipbefore{4pt}
+ \everyasis{\leftindent{7pc}\tenpt\tt}
+ \skipafter{4pt}}
+
+Consider my favorite breakfast recipe:
+\cl{\bd Muckles}
+\asisbegin
+3 eggs beaten
+1 cp cream
+1 cp flour
+1/4t baking powder
+1 T sugar
+pinch of salt
+
+bacon (optional)
+\aie
+Heat butter or bacon in frying pan.
+Pour all of
+the batter into the pan. Cook approximately
+10 minutes at 375 degrees. Cut into pieces
+and serve hot with plenty of syrup.
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Consider my favorite breakfast recipe: |
+| Muckles |
+| |
+| 3 eggs beaten |
+| 1 cp cream |
+| 1 cp flour |
+| 1/4t baking powder |
+| 1 T sugar |
+| pinch of salt |
+| bacon (optional) |
+| |
+| Heat butter or bacon in frying pan. Pour all of the batter into the |
+| pan. Cook approximately 10 minutes at 375 degrees. Cut into pieces and |
+| serve hot with plenty of syrup. |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+
+The \asisformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are
+used.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumbe.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumbe.helpsubh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7acf33349e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumbe.helpsubh
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \numberingstyle COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \numberingstyle command is always used in conjunction with the
+\subheadcformat command and will set the style of numbering for the subheadc
+titles. The format for the \numberingstyle command is:
+
+ \subheadcformat{\numberingstyle{xxx}
+ }
+
+where "xxx" is A, 1, or I. The default \numberingstyle for subheadc is
+\numberingstyle{1}.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumber.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumber.helpsubh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d1e541a8c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumber.helpsubh
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \numberingstyle COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \numberingstyle command is always used in conjunction with the
+\subheaddformat command and will set the style of numbering for the subheadd
+titles. The format for the \numberingstyle command is:
+
+ \subheaddformat{\numberingstyle{xxx}
+ }
+
+where "xxx" is A, 1, or I. The default \numberingstyle for subheadd is
+\numberingstyle{1}.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/apf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/apf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cad86ce1cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/apf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| appendixformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\apfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \appendixformat markup allows you to modify the default markup that
+controls the appearance of the appendix title. The submarkup is described.
+
+\numberingstyle allows you to change the style from capital letters, the
+default, to Arabic numerals (1) or roman numerals (I).
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\appendixformat{\numberingstyle{I}}
+
+\appendix{Glossary}
+
+If this were the fourth appendix, it would print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Appendix IV |
+| Glossary |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\titleformat{Nested Markup} controls the appearance of the appendix title
+banner. You may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \center-
+line within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within
+or outside of \appendixformat:
+
+ * \appendixnumberprints the most recent appendix number.
+
+ * \appendixtitleprints the most recent appendix title.
+
+\incontents determines whether the appendix title is to be included in the
+contents. The default can be changed to no to inhibit the appendix title
+from being included in the contents. See the second example below.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+In this example, the appendix starts a new page, the number and title are
+centered in bold, and one line is skipped afterwards.
+
+\appendixformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject
+
+ \cl{\bd \appendixnumber. \appendixtitle}
+ \vs{1\bl}
+ }
+ \incontents{yes}
+ }
+
+\app{Glossary}
+
+This would print the fourth appendix as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 4. Glossary |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+In this example, the appendix starts a new page (instead of using
+\dumpinsertseject, skips down the page 2 inches, centers the title in
+italics, and skips one line. The title is not put in contents.
+
+\appendixformat{
+ \titleformat{\newpage
+ \vsk{2in}
+ \cl{\it \appendixtitle}
+ \vs{1\bl}}
+ \incontents{no} }
+
+\app{Glossary}
+
+This would print the fourth appendix as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Glossary |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \appendixformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both
+are used.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/app.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/app.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a190f27416
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/app.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| appendix |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\appã%
+
+Parameters: ã|titleã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \appendix markup starts a new page, centers the title in bold and
+adds the title text to the table of contents. Appendices are lettered
+consecutively. This markup can be used as often as necessary.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+Instead, let humanity strive to make good places,
+"eutopias," on earth, peacefully and in good spirit.
+\par
+\appendix{Calculations from "Nuclear Winter"}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Appendix A |
+| Calculations from "Nuclear Winter" |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Refer to the \appendixformat markup if you need to change the appendix
+style.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a72ac7f09e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|APPENDIXã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\appendixformat.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpmenu
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4e5ea240db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpmenu
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| appendixformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\appendixformatÅ\numberingstyleÅAÌ
+ \titleformatÅ\dumpinsertseject
+ \centerlineÅ\twelvept\bold
+ Appendix \appendixnumberÌ
+ \centerlineÅ\twelvept\bold\appendixtitleÌ
+ \vsÅ 1\blÌ
+ \setchapternumberÅ 0Ì
+ \setsubheadanumberÅ 0Ì
+ \setsubheadbnumberÅ 0Ì
+ \setsubheadcnumberÅ 0Ì
+ \setsubheaddnumberÅ 0Ì
+ \setfigurenumberÅ 0Ì
+ \settablenumberÅ 0Ì
+ Ì
+ \incontentsÅ yesÌ
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\apfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \appendixformat markup allows you to modify the default markup that
+controls the appearance of the appendix title. The submarkup is described.
+
+\numberingstyle allows you to change the style from capital letters, the
+default, to Arabic numerals (1) or roman numerals (I).
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\appendixformatÅ \numberingstyleÅ IÌÌ
+\appendixÅ GlossaryÌ
+
+If this were the fourth appendix, it would print as:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Appendix IV |
+| Glossary |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\titleformatÅNested MarkupÌ controls the appearance of the appendix title
+banner. You may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \center-
+line within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within
+or outside of \appendixformat:
+
+ * \appendixnumberprints the most recent appendix number.
+
+ * \appendixtitleprints the most recent appendix title.
+
+\incontents determines whether the appendix title is to be included in the
+contents. The default can be changed to no to inhibit the appendix title
+from being included in the contents. See the second example below.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+In this example, the appendix starts a new page, the number and title are
+centered in bold, and one line is skipped afterwards.
+
+\appendixformatÅ \numberingstyleÅ 1Ì
+ \titleformatÅ \dumpinsertseject
+ \clÅ \bd \appendixnumber. \appendixtitleÌ
+ \vsÅ 1\blÌ
+ Ì
+ \incontentsÅ yesÌ
+ Ì
+\appÅ GlossaryÌ
+
+This would print the fourth appendix as:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 4. Glossary |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+In this example, the appendix starts a new page (instead of using
+\dumpinsertseject, skips down the page 2 inches, centers the title in
+italics, and skips one line. The title is not put in contents.
+
+\appendixformatÅ
+ \titleformatÅ \newpage
+ \vskÅ 2inÌ
+ \clÅ \it \appendixtitleÌ
+ \vsÅ 1\blÌÌ
+ \incontentsÅ noÌ Ì
+\appÅ GlossaryÌ
+
+This would print the fourth appendix as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Glossary |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \appendixformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both
+are used.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asism.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asism.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cf6437cf5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asism.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|ASIS-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the \asisformat
+and if you are using \monospace.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asisp.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asisp.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6c3aeeea9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asisp.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|ASIS-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the \asisformat
+and if you areã|notã%using \monospace.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bd.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bd.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2522f00c01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bd.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| bold |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\bdã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \bold markup sets the typeface to wide strokes, giving a heavy
+impression.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example changes "Parallels" bold. It is changed back with the \roman
+markup.
+
+lowest common denominator.
+\par
+\bold\nin Parallels. \roman Consider for a
+moment rocks and deer . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| lowest common denominator. |
+| Parallels. Consider for a moment rocks and deer . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+The effects of the \bold markup can also be limited by curly braces.
+
+lowest common denominator.
+\par
+\nin{\bd Parallels}. Consider for a
+moment rocks and deer . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| lowest common denominator. |
+| Parallels. Consider for a moment rocks and deer . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Note in the last example the period follows the right curly brace (}.).
+This is necessary to enable the extra spacing which normally follows
+punctuation.
+ Bold is often used for display titles or special emphasis.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bi.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bi.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..277feefcba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bi.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| bolditalic |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\biã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \bolditalic markup sets the typeface to wide strokes and an italic
+slant, giving a heavy impression.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example changes "Parallels" to bold italic. It is changed back with
+the \roman markup.
+
+lowest common denominator.
+\par
+\bolditalic\nin Parallels. \roman Consider for a
+moment rocks and deer . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| lowest common denominator. |
+| Parallels. Consider for a moment rocks and deer . . . |
+| --------- |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+All font sets have \bolditalic defined as a valid type face. Not all font
+sets, however, have bolditalic available. Those font sets that do not
+have bolditalic will give the following warning message when you try to use
+\bolditalic or \bi:
+
+<TEXT1> Warning. No bold italic font in CM12. Will print italic font .)
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bib.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bib.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c827c2717e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bib.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| bibliography |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\bibã%
+
+Parameters: ã|titleã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \bibliography markup starts the bibliography on a new page, centers and
+prints the title in bold face, and enters the title in contents.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\bibliography{References}
+\frenchspacing
+\bibentry
+Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes
+in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical
+Publications, International.
+
+\bibentry
+Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's
+Stone." {\it Mining Truth}. 11:455--601.
+\par
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| References |
+| |
+| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. |
+| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. |
+| |
+| Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining Truth. |
+| 11:455--601. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+
+If you need to print your bibliography with a format different than the
+one illustrated above, refer to the discussion of the \bibliographyformat
+markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibentry.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibentry.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a7106a2db9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibentry.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \bibentry Markup |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation:ã|\bieã%
+
+Parameters:ã|noneã%
+
+Description: The \bibentry markup is used to separate each entry in a
+bibliography with a vertical skip; an entry is in the form of a hanging
+paragraph.
+
+Example:
+
+ \bibliography{Bibliography}
+ ã|\bibentryã%
+ Illite, Ivan. 1911. ''Pickingthe Philosopher's
+ Stone.'' {\it Mining Truth}.11:455--601.
+ ã|\bibentryã%
+ \sameauthor
+ 1978. ''Pet rocks astherapy tools.''
+ {\it Geopsychology Today}. 10:71--78.
+ ã|\bibentryã%
+ Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. {\itGravel and Nothingness:
+ An Existential Theory}. Dayton:Gabbro Press.
+ \par
+
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Bibliography |
+| |
+| Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining |
+| Truth. 11:455--601. |
+| 1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." Geopsychology Today. |
+| 10:71--78. |
+| |
+| Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential |
+| Theory. Dayton: Gabbro Press. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+
+ã|Notes:ã%The series is ended with a \par markup. Without the \par an
+ error results.
+
+ You may use the \sameauthor markup to indicate that the author of one
+ quotation is the same as the previous author.
+
+ To disable the double spacing which normally follows punctuation, use
+ the \frenchspacing markup. The example illustrated for the
+ \bibliography markup was done using \frenchspacing.
+
+ If you need to print yourbibliography with a format different than
+ the one illustrated above, refer to the discussion of the
+ \bibliographyformat markup.
+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliog.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliog.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d8d0303319
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliog.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|BIBLIOGã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\bibliographyformat.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliogr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliogr.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..40eff62e82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliogr.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| \bibliography{title} |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation:ã|\bibã%
+
+Parameters:ã|titleã%
+
+Description: The \bibliography markup starts the bibliography on a new
+page, centers and prints the title in bold face, and enters the title
+in the table of contents.
+
+ Example:
+ ã|\bibliography{ã%Referencesã|}ã%
+ \frenchspacing
+ \bibentry
+ Grabens, Gruss M. 1970.{\it Mechanical Processes
+ in the Human Geomechanism}.Winston: Geomedical
+ Publications, International.
+ \bibentry
+ Illite, Ivan. 1911. ''Pickingthe Philosopher's
+ Stone.'' {\it Mining Truth}.11:455--601.
+ \par
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| References |
+| |
+| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human |
+| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. |
+| |
+| Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|Notes:ã%If you need to print your bibliography with a format different than
+ the one illustrated above, refer to the discussion of the
+ \bibliographyformat markup.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| \bibliographyformat{\incontents{yes} |
+| \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject |
+| \cl{\twelvept\bd \bibtitle} |
+| \vs{\bl}} |
+| \everybibentry{\vs \bl}\goodbreak\hp\nin} |
+| \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex |
+| depth-.5ex}} |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+
+Abbreviation:ã|\bifã%
+
+Parameters: submarkup
+
+Submarkup: \incontents, \titleformat, \everybibentry, \sameauthorrulesize
+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bie.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bie.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cda2435221
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bie.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| bibentry |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\bieã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \bibentry markup is used to separate each entry in a bibliography with a
+vertical skip; an entry is in the form of a hanging paragraph.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\bibliography{Bibliography}
+\bibentry
+Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's
+Stone." {\it Mining Truth}. 11:455--601.
+\bibentry
+\sameauthor
+
+1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools."
+{\it Geopsychology Today}. 10:71--78.
+\bibentry
+Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. {\it Gravel and Nothingness:
+An Existential Theory}. Dayton: Gabbro Press.
+\par
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Bibliography |
+| |
+| Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining Truth. |
+| 11:455--601. |
+| |
+| ....1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." Geopsychology Today. 10:71--78. |
+| |
+| Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential Theory. |
+| Dayton: Gabbro Press. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The series is ended with a \par markup. Without the \par an error results.
+ You may use the \sameauthor markup to indicate that the author of one
+citation is the same as the previous author.
+ To disable the double spacing which normally follows punctuation, use
+the \frenchspacing markup. The example illustrated for the \bibliography
+markup was done using \frenchspacing.
+ If you need to print your bibliography with a format different than the
+one illustrated above, refer to the discussion of the \bibliographyformat
+markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bif.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bif.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2cbb983d68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bif.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,248 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| bibliographyformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\bifã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\incontents, \titleformat, \everybibentry,
+\sameauthorrulesizeã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \bibliographyformat markup controls the style of the entire
+bibliography. The following submarkup is only valid within \bif.
+
+\incontents by default adds the title text to the contents. The default is
+yes; to keep the title from appearing enter "no":
+
+\bibliographyformat{\incontents{no}}
+
+\titleformat{Nested Markup} controls the format of the bibliography title.
+The default skips to a new page, centers the title in bold, and skips one
+line. You may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \centerline
+within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or
+outside of \bibliographyformat:
+
+ * \bibtitleprints the title entered with the \bibliography markup.
+
+\everybibentry{Nested Markup} controls the format of each bibliographic
+entry. The default permits breaking between entries and creates a hanging
+paragraph for the entry. You may use markup such as \verticalspace,
+\hangingparagraph, \item, \goodbreak, \noindent, \label, \leftindent within
+\everybibentry as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside
+of \bibliographyformat:
+
+ * \bibnumberprints the current \bibentry number.
+
+\sameauthorrulesize sets the height, width, and depth of a horizontal line
+used to indicate a repeat of an author's name.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+The following markup produces entries similar to the default but numbered.
+A period and a tie (tilde, for a connecting space) join the number to the
+text.
+
+\bibliographyformat{\incontents{yes}
+ \titleformat{\np
+ \cl{\bd \bibtitle}
+
+ \vs{\bl}
+ }
+ \everybibentry{\goodbreak\hp\nin\bibnumber.~}
+ \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex}
+}
+
+Then when you use \bibentry, you would get:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 1. Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human |
+| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. |
+| 2. Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining Truth. |
+| 11:455--601. |
+| 3. Moraine, Esker. 1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." Geopsychology |
+| Today. 10:71--78. |
+| 4. Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential |
+| Theory. Dayton: Gabbro Press. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example also numbers entries, but it uses labels instead of hanging
+paragraphs. The \labelformat is changed under \titleformat to accommodate
+numbers. This layout is useful for bibliographies that use identifiers in
+place of numbers.
+
+\bibliographyformat{\incontents{yes}
+ \titleformat{\np\vsk{1in}
+ \cl{\bd \bibtitle}
+ \vs{\bl}
+ \labelformat{\labelwidth{22pt}}}
+ \everybibentry{\goodbreak\label{\bibnumber}}
+ \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex}}
+
+Then when you use \bibliography, you would get:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| References |
+| |
+| 1. Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human |
+| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. |
+| |
+| 2. Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential |
+| Theory. Dayton: Gabbro Press. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+You can specify in the \everybibentry markup that the bibentry number is to
+be surrounded by parenthesis or square brackets.
+ \everybibentry{\goodbreak\label{(\bibnumber)}}
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| References |
+| |
+| (1) Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human |
+| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. |
+| |
+| (2) Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential |
+| Theory. Dayton: Gabbro Press. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+You could also use \label to indicate citations that carry an alphanumeric
+label by omitting the parameter to \label in the \everybibentry markup.
+
+\bibliographyformat{\titleformat{\np\cl{\bd \bibtitle}
+ \vs{\bl}
+ \labelformat{\labelwidth{50pt}}}
+ \everybibentry{\goodbreak\label}
+ \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex}}
+
+Then use the \bibentry markup as though it had a parameter:
+
+\bibliography{Citations}\frenchspacing
+\bibentry {Grabe70}
+Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes
+in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical
+Publications, International.
+\bibentry{Illit11}
+Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's
+
+Stone." {\it Mining Truth}. 11:455--601.
+\bibentry{Morai78}
+Moraine, Esker. 1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools."
+{\it Geopsychology Today}. 10:71--78.
+
+and the citations will look like:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Citations |
+| |
+| Grabe70 Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human |
+| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. |
+| |
+| Illit11 Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining |
+| Truth. 11:455--601. |
+| |
+| Morai78 Moraine, Esker. 1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." |
+| Geopsychology Today. 10:71--78. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Another popular style groups all of an author's citations together. This
+can be accomplished in a similar manner as previously defined. The
+difference being that the \rt markup is used.
+
+\bibliographyformat{\titleformat{\np\vsk{1in}
+ \cl{\bd \bibtitle}
+ \vs{\bl}
+ \labelformat{\labelwidth{50pt}}}
+ \everybibentry{\goodbreak\label}
+ \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex}}
+\bibliography{Citations}\frenchspacing
+\vs{.5\bl}
+\nin OSBORNE, J.S.
+\bie{\rt{1971.}}
+{\it Introduction to Aesthetic Anthropology}. Boston, Ma:
+Addison-Wesley Pub. Co.
+\bie{\rt{1978.}}
+A survey of tribal masks used by Brazilian tribes.
+
+Pages 160--169 in {\it Cultural Anthropology}.
+M. Zateh and F. Grange, eds. New York: Harper and Row.
+\vs{.5\bl}
+\nin OTTEN, C.M.
+\bibentry{\rt{1971.}}
+{\it Anthropology and Art: Readings in Cross Cultural
+Aesthetics}. Garden City, N.Y.:
+The Natural History Press.
+
+and the citations will look like:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Citations |
+| |
+| OSBORNE, J.S. |
+| |
+| 1971. Introduction to Aesthetic Anthropology. Boston, Ma: Addison-Wesley |
+| Pub. Co. |
+| |
+| 1978. A survey of tribal masks used by Brazilian tribes. Pages 160--169 |
+| in Cultural Anthropology. M. Zateh and F. Grange, eds. New York: |
+| Harper and Row. |
+| OTTEN, C.M. |
+| |
+| 1971. Anthropology and Art: Readings in Cross Cultural Aesthetics. |
+| Garden City, N.Y.: The Natural History Press. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This final style makes use of an \everybibentry similar to the default. In
+this example, the paragraph and hanging indents are set to different values
+(by default they are equal). The other difference is that \noindent is
+omitted.
+
+\bibliographyformat{\titleformat{\np\cl{\bd \bibtitle}
+ \vs{\bl}
+ \psk{\bl}\pin{10pt}\hin{20pt}}
+ \everybibentry{\par\goodbreak\hp\indent}
+ \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex}}
+\bibliography{Bibliography}\frenchspacing
+\vs{\bl} \nin Asher67
+\bie
+Asherson, G. L., and S. H. Stone. 1967.\linebreak
+Dessensitization {\it in vitro}. {\it Immunology}.
+13:469. {\it Cultural Anthropology}. M. Zateh and
+F. Grange, eds. New York: Harper and Row.
+\vs{\bl}
+\nin Cinad68
+
+\bie
+Cinader, B., editor. 1968.\lbr
+Regulation of the Antibody Response. Charles C. Thomas,
+Publisher, Springfield, Ill.
+
+and the citations will look like:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Bibliography |
+| |
+| Asher67 |
+| Asherson, G. L., and S. H. Stone. 1967. |
+| Dessensitization in vitro. Immunology. 13:469. Cultural Anthropology. |
+| M. Zateh and F. Grange, eds. New York: Harper and Row. |
+| |
+| Cinad68 |
+| Cinader, B., editor. 1968. |
+| Regulation of the Antibody Response. Charles C. Thomas, Publisher, |
+| Springfield, Ill. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \bibliographyformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if
+both are used.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bothpage.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bothpage.helpmenu
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d635af3511
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bothpage.helpmenu
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+ Menu for BOTHPAGES Commands -- TEXT1
+
+A file may be selected for viewing by placing the cursor under any character
+of the file wanted and pressing the PF 1 key. A MENU file is indicated when
+a name is preceded by an asterisk (*). If you are using a terminal that
+doesn't have a CURSOR or PF KEYS then you MUST TYPE in the COMPLETE HELP
+COMMAND with operands and options. For a description of the operands and
+options type HELP HELP.
+
+
+runningheadformat (running top title options)
+runningfootformat (running bottom title options)
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomma.helppage b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomma.helppage
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d9ee022c0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomma.helppage
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \bottommargin (\bma) COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \bottommargin (\bma) command will set the distance from the bottom of the
+page to the last line of the text. This command has the format:
+
+ \bottommargin{uu}
+
+where "uu" is any unit of TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.) or number of
+lines. The default bottom margin is one inch, or \bottommargin{1IN}. This
+command may only appear at the beginning of the TeX input file before any
+actual text is entered.
+
+In order to change the bottom margin from the default of one inch to one-half
+inch, you would enter:
+
+ \bma{.5in}
+
+Which would give you one-half inch between the last line of text on the page
+and the bottom of the page.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpboth b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpboth
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ae217363f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpboth
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \bottomtitle COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \bottomtitle command sets what will appear at the bottom of each page after
+the title page. The \bottomtitle command is always used in conjunction with the
+\runningtitleformat and \bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op)
+commands. This command has the format:
+
+ \bothpages{
+ \bottomtitle{\line{\lft{llll}\ctr{cccc}\rt{rrrr}}
+ }}
+
+where "llll" is the information to be printed to the far left of the
+bottomtitle line; "cccc" is the information to be printed in the center; and
+"rrrr" is the information to be printed to the far right of the bottomtitle
+line. For example:
+
+ \runningtitleformat{\bothpages{
+ \bottomtitle\line{\lft{Joe Smith}\ctr{June 3, 1984}\rt{\pagenumber}}
+ }}
+
+will space down to leave the amount specified on the \bottommargin command and
+put "Joe Smith" at the bottom far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the
+current page number on the bottom far right of the first line of the
+bottomtitle. The running bottomtitle of page 5 would look like this:
+
+Joe Smith June 3, 1984 5
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpeven b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpeven
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a8c4432f10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpeven
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \bottomtitle COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \bottomtitle command sets what will appear at the bottom of each page after
+the title page. The \bottomtitle command is always used in conjunction with the
+\runningtitleformat and \bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op)
+commands. This command has the format:
+
+ \evenpages{
+ \bottomtitle{\line{\lft{llll}\ctr{cccc}\rt{rrrr}}
+ }}
+
+where "llll" is the information to be printed to the far left of the
+bottomtitle line; "cccc" is the information to be printed in the center; and
+"rrrr" is the information to be printed to the far right of the bottomtitle
+line on all even pages. For example:
+
+ \runningtitleformat{\evenpages{
+ \bottomtitle\line{\lft{Joe Smith}\ctr{June 3, 1984}\rt{\pagenumber}}
+ }}
+
+will space down to leave the amount specified on the \bottommargin command and
+put "Joe Smith" at the bottom far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the
+current page number on the bottom far right of the first line of the
+bottomtitle. The running bottomtitle of page 4 would look like this:
+
+Joe Smith June 3, 1984 4
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpoddp b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpoddp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..949dd41432
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpoddp
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \bottomtitle COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \bottomtitle command sets what will appear at the bottom of each page after
+the title page. The \bottomtitle command is always used in conjunction with the
+\runningtitleformat and \bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op)
+commands. This command has the format:
+
+ \oddpages{
+ \bottomtitle{\line{\lft{llll}\ctr{cccc}\rt{rrrr}}
+ }}
+
+where "llll" is the information to be printed to the far left of the
+bottomtitle line; "cccc" is the information to be printed in the center; and
+"rrrr" is the information to be printed to the far right of the bottomtitle
+line on all odd pages. For example:
+
+ \runningtitleformat{\oddpages{
+ \bottomtitle\line{\lft{Joe Smith}\ctr{June 3, 1984}\rt{\pagenumber}}
+ }}
+
+will space down to leave the amount specified on the \bottommargin command and
+put "Joe Smith" at the bottom far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the
+current page number on the bottom far right of the first line of the
+bottomtitle. The running bottomtitle of page 5 would look like this:
+
+Joe Smith June 3, 1984 5
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqb.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..afd01a8162
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqb.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| blockquotebegin |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\bqbã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \blockquotebegin markup ends a paragraph and forces the following text
+into a quote format, indicated by a change in the size of type to 10pt, 6
+points of spacing before and after the quote, and margin indentations of 24
+points.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+Salt (1958) names the process:
+\blockquotebegin
+This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging.
+Most metamorphosis occurs in ocean trenches, but it
+
+can also occur in forms in trenchcoats.
+\paragraph
+The lithosphere---dermosphere in humans---wrinkles
+over time.
+The process is one-way, as rehydration will not
+unwrinkle the surface.
+\blockquoteend
+As far as general surface alteration, only the
+time scale differs between the human . . .
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Salt (1958) names the process: |
+| |
+| This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. Most |
+| metamorphosis occurs in ocean trenches, but it can also occur in |
+| forms in trenchcoats. |
+| The lithosphere---dermosphere in humans---wrinkles over |
+| time. The process is one-way, as rehydration will not unwrinkle |
+| the surface. |
+| |
+| As far as general surface alteration, only the time scale differs |
+| between the human . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Every \blockquotebegin must have a matching \blockquoteend. If the quote is
+not ended with \blockquoteend, all following text is formatted as a block
+quote, and a warning message appears at the end of formatting which says:
+
+(\end occurred inside a group at level 1)
+Output written on TEXT1$$.dvi (1 page, 436 bytes).
+Transcript written on TEXT1$$.texlog.
+
+ The defaults for \blockquotebegin differ when you are using \monospace.
+With \monospace, there is no font change, one line is skipped before and
+after the block quote, and the left and right indentations are both 1 2
+inch.
+ Refer to the \blockquoteformat for instructions on how to change the
+block quote style.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqe.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqe.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c10fddc23b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqe.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| blockquoteend |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\bqeã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \blockquoteend markup ends the quote and returns text to the normal
+margins and sizes. Text following is formatted as a new paragraph.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+Salt (1958) names the process:
+\blockquotebegin
+\rightragged
+This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging.
+Most metamorphosis occurs in ocean trenches, but it
+can also occur in forms in trenchcoats.
+
+\paragraph
+The lithosphere --- dermosphere in humans ---
+wrinkles over time.
+The process is one-way, as rehydration will not
+unwrinkle the surface.
+\blockquoteend
+As far as general surface alteration, only the
+time scale differs between the human . . .
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Salt (1958) names the process: |
+| |
+| This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. Most |
+| metamorphosis occurs in ocean trenches, but it can also occur in |
+| forms in trenchcoats. |
+| The lithosphere --- dermosphere in humans --- wrinkles over |
+| time. The process is one-way, as rehydration will not unwrinkle |
+| the surface. |
+| |
+| As far as general surface alteration, only the time scale differs |
+| between the human . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fdae8155cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| blockquoteformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\bqfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \everyblockquote, \skipafterã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \blockquoteformat markup controls the formatting of block quotes. The
+following submarkup are effective only within block quotes.
+
+\skipbefore indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a
+block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips.
+
+\everyblockquote{Nested Markup} determines how the text of the quote is
+formatted. You can specify justification or raggedness, single or double
+spacing, left or right indentation, paragraph spacing and indentation, and
+any font change needed within block quotes. You may use any markup such as
+\tenpt, \interlineskip, \leftindent or \rightindent within \everyblockquote.
+
+\skipafter indicates how much space is to be skipped after printing a
+block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+The indentation has been changed in this sample. The text for the block
+quote is to be printed right ragged in 9 point Computer Modern. Paragraphs
+within the block quote, and only within, have a 1 pica paragraph indent and
+zero paragraph skip. The skips before and after the quotation have been set
+to zero.
+
+\blockquoteformat{\skipbefore{0pt}
+ \everyblockquote{\pin{1pc}\psk{0pt}\ninepoint
+ \leftindent{1pc}\rightindent{1pc}\rr}
+ \skipafter{0pt}}
+
+The example illustrated for \blockquotebegin would then begin:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Salt (1958) names the process: |
+| |
+| This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. Most metamorphosis |
+| occurs in ocean trenches, but it can also occur in forms in |
+| trenchcoats. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This sample is printed with a small interlineskip, normal paragraph values
+and zero indentation. The text is in 9 point italics with an interlineskip
+of 9.5 points.
+
+\blockquoteformat{\skipbefore{0pt}
+ \everyblockquote{\ssp\ninept\it\isk{9.5pt}
+ \leftindent{0pt}\rightindent{0pt}}
+ \skipafter{0pt}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Salt (1958) names the process: |
+| |
+| This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. Most metamorphosis |
+| occurs in ocean trenches, but it can also occur in forms in trenchcoats. |
+| |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \blockquoteformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both
+are used.
+ The defaults for \blockquoteformat when using \monospace are different.
+The space before and after is one blank line (1\bl), the left and right
+indents are 36 points ( 1 2 inch), and the text is in the roman font since
+you cannot print \tenpt with \monospace.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotem.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..605bacc116
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotem.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|BQUOTE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\blockquoteformat and if you are using \monospace.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotep.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..879bbe76b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotep.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|BQUOTE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\blockquoteformat and if you areã|notã%using \monospace.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/break.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/break.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..96925e779d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/break.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| break |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+If you want to force TEXT1 to break between lines at a certain point in the
+middle of a paragraph use the markup \break.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+To everything there is a season, and a time
+to every purpose under the
+heaven: A time to be born, and a time to
+pluck up {\it that which is}\break
+planted; A time to kill, and a time to heal;
+a time to break down, and
+a time to build up; A time to weep,
+and a time to laugh;
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| To everything there is a season, and a time to every purpose under |
+| the heaven: A time to be born, and a time to pluck up that which is |
+| planted; A time to kill, and a time to heal; a time to break down, and a |
+| time to build up; A time to weep, and a time to laugh; |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+To avoid having the white space between the words as is illustrated in the
+third line in the above example, use the \linebreak markup.
+ For more on the \break markup, refer to The TEXbook.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitle.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitle.helpsubh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b4b0c741fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitle.helpsubh
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \titleformat COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \titleformat command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadcformat
+command and will set options for the subheadc titles. The format for the
+\titleformat command is:
+
+ \subheadcformat{\titleformat{
+ \vsk{24pt}
+ {\subheadctitle}
+ \vs{12pt}}
+ }
+
+This is the default for \titleformat. Each \subheadc command will space down 24
+points, print the \subheadctitle and space down 12 points to resume with the
+text.
+
+For more information on the \subheadctitle command, see the help screen under
+the markup menu for that particular command.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitlef.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitlef.helpsubh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f51b183132
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitlef.helpsubh
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \titleformat COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \titleformat command is always used in conjunction with the \subheaddformat
+command and will set options for the subheadd titles. The format for the
+\titleformat command is:
+
+ \subheaddformat{\titleformat{
+ {\it \subheaddtitle:}
+ }
+
+This is the default for \titleformat. Each \subheadd command will start a new
+paragraph, print the \subheaddtitle in italics followed by a colon and then
+resume with the text.
+
+For more information on the \subheaddtitle command, see the help screen under
+the markup menu for that particular command.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bul.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bul.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..03d57913d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bul.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| bullet |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\bulã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \bullet markup produces a raised centered dot as an identifier for an
+item in a list.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+the following necessary trace elements:
+\listbegin
+\bul Copper
+\bul Manganese
+\bul Selenium
+\bul Zinc
+\listend
+
+\nin The mineral content of the body . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| the following necessary trace elements: |
+| * Copper |
+| * Manganese |
+| * Selenium |
+| * Zinc |
+| The mineral content of the body . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+A list of bullets must be placed within the \listbegin and \listend markup.
+The bullets are indented 5 characters, like the first level of an ordered
+list. Bullets may also be used in outline lists where they are indented
+5 characters from the previous level by default. Refer to the \listformat
+markup to change the amount of indentation.
+
+ When in math mode, the \bullet markup is used in the same fashion as
+described in The TEXbook.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cc.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..29255b1074
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cc.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| caps |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\ccã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \caps markup sets the typeface to "caps/small caps".
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example changes "Parallels" to caps/small caps. It is changed back
+with the \roman markup.
+
+lowest common denominator.
+\par
+\nin\caps Parallels. \roman Consider for a
+moment rocks and deer . . .
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| lowest common denominator. |
+| Parallels. Consider for a moment rocks and deer . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Caps/small caps are often used for display titles or special emphasis. It
+should not be used for the body of text. Not all font sets have small
+caps available. Those font sets that do not have small caps will give the
+following warning message when you try to use \caps or \cc:
+
+<TEXT1> Warning. No small caps font in CMSAN8. Will print roman font .)
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cents.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cents.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ac5118d383
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cents.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| cents |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+This markup is used to print a cent sign.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This machine takes 35\cents\ instead of 25\cents.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| This machine takes 35c instead of 25c. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \cents markup must be followed either by a backslash-space, or by a
+tilde (~).
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chap.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chap.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..51aba6b4c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chap.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| chapter |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\chapã%
+
+Parameters: ã|titleã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \chapter markup starts a new page, centers the title in bold face,
+and enters it in the table of contents. The text of a title is the only
+parameter.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+Anything less is more realistic.
+\par
+\chapter{Nationalism}
+Nationalism is directly related to war.
+Lord Acton observed that nationalism aims solely . . .
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Chapter 1 |
+| Nationalism |
+| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that |
+| nationalism aims solely . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you want to force TEXT1 to split a long chapter title at a place of your
+choosing, use \linebreak.
+
+\chapter{Subject Index\linebreak
+and\lbr
+Concordance}
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Chapter 1 |
+| Subject Index |
+| and |
+| Concordance |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Refer to \chapterformat on the next page to change the chapter style.
+ Each time you use \chapter it resets the subhead numbers to zero.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chapter.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chapter.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e801d05132
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chapter.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|CHAPTERã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\chapterformat.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c20cd7f815
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| chapterformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber}
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle}
+ \vs{1\bl}
+ \setsubheadanumber{0}
+ \setsubheadbnumber{0}
+ \setsubheadcnumber{0}
+ \setsubheaddnumber{0}}
+ \incontents{yes}}
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\chfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \chapterformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that controls
+the appearance of the chapter title. The submarkup is described.
+
+\numberingstyle allows you to change the style from Arabic numerals, the
+default, to letters {A} or roman numerals {I}.
+
+\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{A}}
+
+\titleformat{Nested Markup} controls the appearance of the chapter title
+banner. You may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \center-
+line within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within
+or outside of \chapterformat:
+
+ * \chapternumberprints the most recent chapter number.
+
+ * \chaptertitleprints the most recent chapter title.
+
+\incontents places the chapter title in contents (if one is printed).
+Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no."
+
+\chapterformat{\incontents{no}}
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+When you enter,
+
+\chapter{Introduction}
+
+you get the default chapter style which looks like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Chapter 1 |
+| Introduction |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+In the following example this default style has been modified such that each
+chapter starts on a new page, the title is centered in bold (no chapter
+number printed), and one line is skipped after the chapter title.
+
+\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+
+ \titleformat{\newpage
+ \cl{\bd \chaptertitle}
+ \vs{1\bl}}
+ \incontents{yes}}
+
+Then each time you specify \chapter you will get:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Introduction |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+In this sample, each chapter title is prefaced by the chapter number. As
+before, the title is centered in bold, and one line is skipped before text.
+
+\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\newpage
+ \cl{\bd\chapternumber.~\chaptertitle}
+
+ \vs{1\bl}}
+ \incontents{yes}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 1. Introduction |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \chapterformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are
+used.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chrono.changes b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chrono.changes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..55451d7c10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chrono.changes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+6/22/90:
+
+1) removed filemana.helpmark
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincon.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincon.helpsubh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1f487912fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincon.helpsubh
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \incontents COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \incontents command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadcformat
+command and will determine whether subheadc titles are included in the Table of
+Contents. The format for the \incontents command is:
+
+ \subheadcformat{
+ \incontents{yes}
+ }
+
+By default, the subheadc titles will not be included in the Table of Contents.
+If you want the subheadc titles included in the Table of Contents, enter
+\incontents{yes} within the \subheadcformat command.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincont.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincont.helpsubh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b6061267cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincont.helpsubh
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \incontents COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \incontents command is always used in conjunction with the \subheaddformat
+command and will determine whether subheadd titles are included in the Table of
+Contents. The format for the \incontents command is:
+
+ \subheaddformat{
+ \incontents{no}
+ }
+
+By default, the subheadd titles will not be included in the Table of Contents.
+If you want the subheadd titles included in the Table of Contents, enter
+\incontents{yes} within the \subheaddformat command.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cl.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..67836f2dfe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cl.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| centerline |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\clã%
+
+Parameters: ã|textã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \centerline markup ends the previous paragraph and places equal blank
+spaces on both sides of a word or phrase on a single line. This markup is
+useful for titles and emphasis. The only parameter for this markup is the
+text to be centered.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\centerline{SOCIOGEOLOGY\lbr
+Minerals and Human Behavior}
+\vs{12pt}
+\centerline{by Achilles Chert}
+\vs{24pt}
+
+"Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| SOCIOGEOLOGY |
+| Minerals and Human Behavior |
+| |
+| by Achilles Chert |
+| |
+| |
+| "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+You may use \linebreak within \centerline.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/clb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/clb.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e4216ca42c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/clb.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| centerlinesbegin |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\clbã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \centerlinesbegin markup ends the previous paragraph and starts a series
+of centered lines. This markup is useful for titles and emphasis. There
+are no parameters.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\centerlinesbegin
+SOCIOGEOLOGY
+Minerals and Human Behavior
+\vs{18pt}
+Achilles Chert
+
+\centerlinesend
+\vs{24pt}
+"Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| SOCIOGEOLOGY |
+| Minerals and Human Behavior |
+| |
+| |
+| Achilles Chert |
+| |
+| |
+| "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Each \centerlinesbegin must be followed by a matching \centerlinesend.
+
+ You can also use \centerlinesbegin before a \drawbox or \paragraphbox,
+but not within either markup.
+ You cannot use \centerlinesbegin within any of the following markup:
+\appendix, \autofootnote, \bibliography, \centerline, \chapter, \drawbox,
+\figure, \footnote, \item, \label, \marginnote, \paragraphbox, \part,
+\preface, \rightline, \runningheadformat, \runningfootformat, \subheada,
+\subheadb, \subheadc, \subheadd, or \tabletitle.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\centerlinesbegin
+\paragraphbox{John H. Whalley
+{\it publishing vice president}
+\vs{\bl}
+John B. Dykeman
+{\it associate publisher}}
+\centerlinesend
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| John H. Whalley |
+| publishing vice president |
+| |
+| John B. Dykeman |
+| associate publisher |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cle.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cle.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bd7f8b0633
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cle.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| centerlinesend |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\cleã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \centerlinesend markup ends a series of centered lines and returns to a
+paragraph mode. There are no parameters.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+The prerequisites to operate this hardware are:
+\vs{2\bl}
+\clb
+6085 Professional Computer System
+ViewPoint Software
+VP Document Editor Software
+Signed Software License Agreement
+
+\cle
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| The prerequisites to operate this hardware are: |
+| |
+| |
+| 6085 Professional Computer System |
+| ViewPoint Software |
+| VP Document Editor Software |
+| Signed Software License Agreement |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/contents.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/contents.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0c9c11c617
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/contents.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|CONTENTSã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\tableofcontentsformat.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/coul.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/coul.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0dc940202f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/coul.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| countinglines |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\coulã%
+
+Parameters: ã|statusã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+This markup is used to start counting lines for line numbering in the margin
+of a document. Status is true or false.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To start line numbering you enter
+
+\countinglines{true}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+
+Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is
+ignored for all other printers.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/db.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/db.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3cd7e700ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/db.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| drawbox |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\dbã%
+
+Parameters: ã|textã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+A box is a grouping of rules into a square or rectangle. You can draw a box
+with the \drawbox markup. The parameter for this markup is the material to
+be put inside the box. Any grouping less than a paragraph can be boxed,
+including letters, sentences, figures, or tables.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To draw a box around an "a", you would enter:
+
+Draw a box around \drawbox{a}
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| ..... |
+| Draw a box around . . |
+| ..... |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you want to draw an empty 1 inch square (plus the box "rule size" and
+"mat size") you could enter,
+
+\db{\vrule width 0pt height 1in
+\vrule width 1in height 0pt depth 0pt}
+ ..............
+ . .
+ . .
+ . .
+ . .
+ . .
+ . .
+which prints: ..............
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Do not use this markup with \monospace or around \settabs or \halign.
+ Paragraphs cannot be boxed with \drawbox unless each one is put in a
+vertical box (see \vbox). Use the \paragraphbox markup instead.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbm.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbm.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..46df8d2cf9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbm.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| drawboxmat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\dbmã%
+
+Parameters: ã|unit of measureã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \drawboxmat markup determines the amount of space between the rule and
+the text. This is the area that has been shaded in the illustration at the
+bottom of the page. This space is used with the \drawbox and \paragraphbox
+markup. The default is 3 points.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\drawboxmat{20pt}
+Draw a box around \drawbox{a}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| ......... |
+| . . |
+| . a . |
+| . . |
+| Draw a box around ......... |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbrs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbrs.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..88a1713cba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbrs.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| drawboxrulesize |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\dbrsã%
+
+Parameters: ã|unit of measureã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \drawboxrulesize markup determines the thickness of the rule that makes
+up the box itself. The default is .4 point. This rule thickness is used by
+both \drawbox and \paragraphbox.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\drawboxrulesize{2pt}
+Draw a box around \drawbox{a}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| ..... |
+| . a . |
+| Draw a box around ..... |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/die.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/die.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9278cca2bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/die.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| dumpinsertseject |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\dieã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+This markup is used to dump (print) all accumulated figures and tables
+(inserts) entered with \figure, \topinsert or \midinsert. After printing
+the figures and other inserts, a new page is started. If no inserts had
+been accumulated, a new page is still started. This markup appears in many
+of the format markup, such as \chapterformat.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber}
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle}
+ \vs{1\bl}
+ \setsubheadanumber{0}
+ \setsubheadbnumber{0}
+ \setsubheadcnumber{0}
+ \setsubheaddnumber{0}
+ }
+ \incontents{yes}
+ }
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \topinsert and \midinsert markup are discussed in The TEXbook.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dsp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dsp.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f9f2cbc586
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dsp.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| doublespace |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\dspã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The doublespace markup leaves alternate line spaces blank. This markup
+causes a break in text. There are no parameters. Double spacing will be in
+effect until changed with a \singlespace markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\singlespace
+All things considered, Camus has derived
+a solid conglomerate of grail theories
+for us.
+\doublespace
+
+Let me close with another penetrating insight from
+Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom,
+because of the inevitability of entropic direction.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| All things considered, Camus has derived a solid conglomerate of grail |
+| theories for us. |
+| |
+| Let me close with another penetrating insight from Camus: The rock |
+| |
+| should be left at the bottom, because of the inevitability of entropic |
+| |
+| direction. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/el.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/el.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..349690ca9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/el.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| ellipsis |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\elã%
+
+Parameters: ã|nã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+Ellipsis points indicate any omission of a word, line, or paragraph from
+a quoted passage. Three points are used when the omission occurs with a
+sentence or fragment. Four points are used when the omission is a whole
+sentence or more, including whole paragraphs.
+ In using the \ellipsis markup, n may be "3" or "4". The \ellipsis3
+markup inserts three points, surrounded by appropriate spacing. ( . . .
+) The \ellipsis4 markup inserts four points, immediately after a sentence,
+with space after the last point. ( . . . . )
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+The following quote has been shortened with ellipses.
+
+names the process:
+\blockquotebegin
+This loss of fluids is known as aging\ellipsis4
+The lithosphere\ellipsis3 wrinkles over time.
+The process is one-way, as rehydration will not
+unwrinkle the surface.
+\blockquoteend
+As far as general surface alteration, only the . . .
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| names the process: |
+| |
+| This loss of fluids is known as aging . . . . The |
+| lithosphere . . . wrinkles over time. The process is |
+| one-way, as rehydration will not unwrinkle the surface. |
+| |
+| As far as general surface alteration, only the . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+No additional space is required around the ellipsis markup, since space is
+included.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4faefbc558
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| endnoteformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\endnoteformat{\skipbefore{4pt}
+ \textreferenceposition{down}
+ \textreferencefont{\rm}
+ \textreferencestyle{[1]}
+ \notereferenceposition{down}
+ \notereferencefont{\tenpt}
+ \notereferencestyle{1.}
+ \notereferencegutter{1em}
+ \everyendnote{\tenpt\pin{0pt}\lin{1.2em}}}
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\enfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \textreferenceposition,
+\textreferencefont, \textreferencestyle, \notereferenceposition, \noterefer-
+encefont, \notereferencestyle, \notereferencegutter, \everyendnoteã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \endnoteformat markup allows you to modify the shape and presentation of
+endnotes generated with \autoendnote.
+
+\skipbefore indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a
+block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips.
+
+\textreferenceposition determines if the endnote reference number is
+superscripted or not. By default, the reference is not superscripted. If
+you want the endnote reference number to be superscripted, then change the
+parameter to "up".
+
+\textreferencefont lets you change the face or size. By default the
+endnote reference number is always printed in the standard font.
+
+\textreferencestyle determines the numbering style at the end of a chapter
+or the end of the document (wherever the \printendnotes appears). There are
+five possible values:
+ 1. "1" for numbered endnotes
+ 2. "(1)" for numbered endnotes with parentheses
+ 3. "[1]" for numbered endnotes with square brackets
+ 4. "a" for lettered endnotes
+ 5. "(a)" for lettered endnotes with parentheses
+The default is Arabic numerals in square brackets.
+
+\notereferenceposition determines if the endnote reference number is
+superscripted or not when it is printed at the end of a chapter or the end
+of a document. By default, the reference is not superscripted. If you want
+the endnote reference number to be superscripted, then change the parameter
+to "up".
+
+\notereferencefont lets you change the face or size. By default the
+endnote reference number printed at the end of a chapter (or end of a
+document, wherever \printendnotes occurs) is always printed in the standard
+font.
+
+\notereferencestyle determines the numbering style. There are five
+possible values:
+ 1. "1." for numbered endnotes
+ 2. "(1)" for numbered endnotes with parentheses
+ 3. "[1]" for numbered endnotes with square brackets
+ 4. "a" for lettered endnotes
+ 5. "(a)" for lettered endnotes with parentheses
+The default is numbered endnotes.
+
+\notereferencegutter specifies the amount of space between the endnote
+number and the endnote text. The gutter is illustrated here as the shaded
+portion between "1." and "The first step":
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| ... |
+| 1....The first step . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\everyendnote lets you modify the shape of the notes. You can change the
+type face, the paragraph parameters, and the right and left indentation.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example shows an endnote style with a superscripted endnote number; the
+body of the endnote in a 9 point Computer Modern set; the endnote at the end
+of the document (or chapter) indented half an inch from the left and half an
+inch from the right of the rest of the body of the text; the endnote body
+right ragged; and the text of the document right justified and in 10 point
+
+Computer Modern. The endnote "text" reference at the end of the chapter
+will retain the default style ("1." not superscripted).
+ Note that 9 point was specified within both the "notereferencefont" and
+"everyendnote" markups. The "notereferencefont" determines the font that
+the endnote reference number is to be printed in. The "everyendnote" markup
+determines the font that the endnote text is to print in at the end of the
+document or end of chapter, wherever the next \printendnotes markup appears.
+
+\endnoteformat{\skipbefore{12pt}
+ \textreferenceposition{up}
+ \textreferencefont{\ninepoint\rm}
+ \textreferencestyle{1}
+ \notereferenceposition{down}
+ \notereferencefont{\ninepoint\rm}
+ \notereferencestyle{1.}
+ \everyendnote{\rightragged
+ \pin{0pt}\psk{12pt}\ninepoint
+ \leftindent{.5in}\rightindent{.5in}}
+ }
+
+
+| . . automatically sets an interline skip 2 points greater |
+than the font size.\autoendnote{This extra space is
+referred to as leading.} The default font size is . . .
+
+The endnote in the document would look like:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| . . . automatically sets an interline skip 2 points greater than the |
+| font size. The default font size is . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+The endnote printed after the \printendnotes markup would look like:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 1. This extra space is referred to as leading. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \endnoteformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are
+used.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotem.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8afb34d2bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotem.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|ENOTE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\endnoteformat and if you are using \monospace.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotep.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2c37af8a98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotep.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|ENOTE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\endnoteformat and if you areã|noteã%using \monospace.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ep.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ep.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4dae99a110
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ep.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| emptypage |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\epã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \emptypage markup advances the page count, leaving an "empty" page,
+which can be placed with custom figures or diagrams. There is no break in
+text. There are no parameters for this markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To float an empty page, enter the sequence:
+same proportions (Figure 2, on the following page).
+\par
+\emptypage
+This suggests parallels in evolution.
+
+Generally speaking, there are three
+possible solutions . . .
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To have an empty page print immediately between the sentence ending "page)."
+and the one beginning "This suggests . . . " you would enter follow the
+\emptypage with a \newpage:
+same proportions (Figure 2, on the following page).
+\par
+\emptypage
+\newpage
+This suggests parallels in evolution.
+Generally speaking, there are three
+possible solutions . . .
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Unlike \newpage, if you enter two \emptypage markup in a row, you will get
+two empty pages when the page is ejected.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/epm.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/epm.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3e9165e6a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/epm.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| evenpagemargin |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\epmã%
+
+Parameters: ã|measurementã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+This markup is used to indicate where a document's line numbering is to be
+printed on even pages. The default is 50.8 points from the left edge on
+even pages.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To indicate that you want line numbering to start at 1 inch from the left
+edge you would enter at the beginning of your document:
+
+\evenpagemargin{1in}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is
+ignored for all other printers.
+ Valid values for \evenpagemargin are 0 to 2 to the 32d power points,
+practical values are 5-860 points.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ex.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ex.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e56dd2f3e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ex.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| extension |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\exã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \extension markup sets the face to the Computer Modern Math Extension
+face. Refer to The TEXbook, Appendix F, for a complete list of the
+characters available in the Extension face.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example uses \extension to print an "O dot":
+
+Put a {\extension\char'113} next to . . .
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Put a K next to . . . |
+| |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+For more on the use of the \char markup, refer to The TEXbook.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fif.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fif.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..049452e975
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fif.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| figureformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\figureformat{\skipbefore{1\bl}
+ \position{\float}
+ \titleformat{\bqb\hp\tenpt
+ \bd Figure \figurenumber.
+ \rm\figuretitle \bqe}
+ \incontents{yes}
+ \skipafter{1\bl}
+ }
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\fifã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \position, \titleformat,
+\incontents, \skipafterã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \figureformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that control the
+appearance of the figure. The submarkup is described.
+
+ã|\skipbeforeã% indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a
+figure block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips.
+
+ã|\positionã% By default, text is floated around a figure and the figure
+printed at the top of the next page if not enough room remains on the
+current page to print the figure. If you do not want text to float around
+the figure, and you want the figure to print exactly where you place it, use
+\position{\nofloat}.
+
+\figureformat{\position{\nofloat}}
+
+ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% controls the appearance of the figure title.
+You may use markup such as \blockquotebegin, \hangingparagraph, \vertical-
+space, and \centerline within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup
+you may use within or outside of \figureformat:
+
+ * \figurenumberprints the most recent figure number.
+
+ * \figuretitleprints the most recent figure title.
+
+ã|\skipafterã% indicates how much space is to be skipped after printing the
+figure title. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips.
+
+ã|\incontentsã% places the figure title in contents (if one is printed).
+Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no."
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+The amount of space skipped before and after has been reduced to 6 points
+(half a line with 12 point interline space), the figure number is placed in
+\label and the figure title is printed in italics.
+
+\figureformat{\skipbefore{6pt}
+ \titleformat{\label{\bd Figure \figurenumber.}
+ \it\figuretitle}
+ \skipafter{6pt}
+ \incontents{yes}
+ }
+
+\figure{\halign{\ctr{#}&&\hs{1em}\ctr{#}\cr
+July 23&July 27&July 31&August 5&August 9\cr
+32&67&44&47&18\cr}{Size data of a Yellow
+
+Transparent fruit during the period of July 23 to August 9,
+1977. (fruit No. IV@_b@)}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| July 23 July 27 July 31 August 5 August 9 |
+| 32 67 44 47 18 |
+| |
+| Figure 1. Size data of a Yellow Transparent fruit during the period of |
+| July 23 to August 9, 1977. (fruit No. IV[b]) |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \figureformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are
+used. If you are using \monospace, the only difference in defaults is
+
+that the figure title is printed in the roman \monospace font instead of
+\tenpt.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fig.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fig.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..be6fe909ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fig.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| figure |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\figã%
+
+Parameters: ã|first parameter = markup
+ second parameter = the figure titleã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+A figure is a representation or illustration. The \figure markup can leave
+space for a figure, number it, print the figure title, and ensure that the
+title gets placed in the contents. The figure markup has two parameters:
+markup and the title of the figure.
+ The "markup" can be a \verticalspace markup, \fullpage, \halfpage, or
+text such as a table, etc. The "title" is the title of the figure which
+will print at the bottom of the figure and in the table of contents.
+ If you want a figure on an entire page, enter \fullpage as the first
+parameter. If you want a figure to fill half of the page, enter \halfpage
+as the first parameter.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you want to use \asisbegin, it must go outside of the figure and the
+title cannot be more than one line long.
+
+\aib
+\figure{\tt
+ clay
+ Human
+ pressure
+ parent rock
+ temperature
+}{Origin of the Stone Species}
+\aie
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| clay |
+| Human |
+| pressure |
+| parent rock |
+| temperature |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| Figure 1. Origin of the Stone Species |
+| |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This figure leaves half an inch of space above the title, "Size data of a
+| . . ". |
+
+the same proportions.
+\db{\figure{\vs{.5in}}{Size data of a Yellow
+Transparent fruit during the period of July 23 to August 9,
+1977. (fruit No. IV@_b@)}
+This suggests parallels . . . }
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| Figure 2. Size data of a Yellow Transparent fruit during the |
+| period of July 23 to August 9, 1977. (fruit No. IV[b]) |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This figure leaves an entire empty page for the figure. The title would
+print at the bottom of the figure.
+
+the same proportions.
+\figure{\fullpage}{Origins of the Human Species}
+This suggests parallels . . .
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This figure leaves a half page empth for the figure. The title would print
+at the bottom of the figure.
+
+the same proportions.
+\figure{\halfpage}{Origins of the Human Species}
+This suggests parallels . . .
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+
+By default, text "floated" is text that is moved in front of a figure. The
+figure is moved to the top of the current page if there is room left. If
+not enough room remains, then the figure is printed at the top of the next
+page. To disable this floating process, refer to the \figureformat markup.
+ For both \halfpage and \fullpage, the figure title is included in
+determining how much space to leave.
+ By default, each new \part will start numbering figures over again at 1.
+Use \setfigurenumber to reset the figurenumber outside of parts.
+ When figures are using the default "float" method of placing figures,
+you cannot use \twocolumns or \threecolumns in parameter 1. If you
+are using the \nofloat option specified in \figureformat you may use the
+multiple column specifications.
+ Use the \figureformat markup to modify the figure style.
+ You can not use \settabs within \figure.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurem.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c9c8c14c17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurem.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|FIGURE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\figureformat and if you are using \monospace.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurep.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b8785b18b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurep.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|FIGURE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\figureformat and if you areã|notã%using \monospace.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fixf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fixf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..15063d06b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fixf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| fixedformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\fixfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+TEXT1 offers two multiple column formats that have different text handling
+capabilities. The normal (default) style is called "flexibleformat". This
+is described with \twocolumns and \threecolumns markup. There is an
+optional style you can use called "fixedformat." The flexible format can be
+changed to the fixed format by inserting the markup \fixedformat before the
+first two or three column markup appears.
+ The Fixed format makes each column act as if it were a single page.
+Inserts and footnotes will appear in each column just as they would in the
+single column format. Only the running head and running foot will print
+across the full width of the page.
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+
+Since each column is handled like a normal single column page, the columns
+may not be balanced. A short right hand column will remain short when
+formatting is completed.
+ The Fixed format cannot be used to format combinations of single,
+double, and triple columns on the same page. The two column and three
+column markup can be used in conjunction with one another, but not on the
+same page. If both format markup appear on the same page, TEXT1 will fill
+the bottom of the current column on the current page with white space and
+change to the new format on the following page.
+ Once the fixed format has been specified, it will remain in force for
+the remainder of the document. The Fixed format cannot be changed to the
+Flexible format again within the same document.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a1d3bd0491
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| footnoteformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\footnoteformat{\skipbeforedivider{12pt}
+ \skipafterdivider{2.6pt}
+ \footnotedivider{144pt}
+ \textreferenceposition{up}
+ \textreferenceplacement{after}
+ \textreferencefont{\tenpt}
+ \textreferencestyle{1}
+ \notereferenceposition{down}
+ \notereferencefont{\tenpt}
+ \notereferencestyle{1.}
+ \notereferencegutter{1em}
+ \everyfootnote{\tenpt\pin{20pt}
+ \lin{0pt}}
+ }
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\fnfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\skipbeforedivider, \skipafterdivider,
+\footnotedivider, \textreferenceposition,
+\textreferenceplacement, \textreferencefont,
+\textreferencestyle, \textreferencegutter,
+\everyfootnote, \notereferenceposition,
+\notereferencefont, \notereferencestyle,
+\notereferencegutterã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+To change the footnote style and any of the other footnote formatting
+options of the \autofootnote markup, use the \footnoteformat markup. The
+default footnote format is:
+
+ã|\skipbeforedividerã% determines the distance between the last line of text
+on a page and the footnote divider rule which is printed just before the
+footnotes. The default for this markup is 12 points.
+
+ã|\skipafterdividerã% determines the distance between the footnote divider rule
+and the first footnote. The default for this markup is 2.5 points.
+
+ã|\footnotedividerã% determines the length of a short rule that separates the
+footnotes from text. The default value is 144 points (2 inches).
+
+ã|\textreferencepositionã% determines if the footnote reference number is a
+superscript or not. By default, the reference is superscripted (up). If
+you want the footnote reference number to be on the baseline, change the
+parameter to "down". The default for \monospace is "down". Do not change
+it to "up" for \monospace.
+
+\textreferenceplacement determines if the footnote reference number
+precedes or follows the word being noted. By default, the reference
+will follow the noted word. If you want the footnote reference number to be
+placed before the word being noted, then change the parameter to "before".
+
+ã|\textreferencefontã% lets you determine how to print the footnote number.
+The default is the roman face at 10 point. For \monospace, the default is
+the roman typewriter printer face.
+
+ã|\textreferencestyleã% determines the numbering style. There are four
+possible values:
+ 1. "1" for numbered superscripted footnotes
+ 2. "(1)" for numbered footnotes surrounded with parentheses
+ 3. "a" for lettered footnotes
+ 4. "(a)" for lettered footnotes surrounded with parentheses
+The default is \textreferencestyle{1} for composing printers. Typewriter
+printers using \monospace have a default of \textreferencestyle{(1)}.
+
+ã|\notereferencepositionã% determines whether the footnote reference number in
+the note is a superscript or not. By default, the reference is on the
+baseline. If you want the footnote reference number to be superscripted,
+change the parameter to "up". Do note specify "up" for typewriter printers
+using \monospace.
+
+ã|\notereferencefontã% lets you determine what font to print the footnote
+number in. The default is standard face at 10 point. For \monospace, the
+default is the roman typewriter printer face.
+
+ã|\notereferencestyleã% determines the numbering style for the notes. There
+are four possible values:
+ 1. "1" for numbered superscripted footnotes
+ 2. "(1)" for numbered footnotes surrounded with parentheses
+ 3. "a" for lettered footnotes
+ 4. "(a)" for lettered footnotes surrounded with parentheses
+The default is \textreferencestyle{1.}.
+
+\notereferencegutter sets the distance between the footnote number and the
+first word of text of the note. The gutter is illustrated here as the
+shaded portion between "1." and "The first step":
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| .... |
+| 1....The first step . . . |
+| .... |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The default is one em space, \notereferencegutter{1em}.
+
+\everyfootnote{Nested Markup} sets the style for everyfootnote. You can
+change the type face, the paragraph parameters, and the right and left
+indentation. The default text size is 10 point; each note is in paragraph
+format, with an indent of 20 points. Typewriter printers which must use
+\monospace may not change to another font set.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+The following example uses a footnote style that prints a superscripted
+footnote number in the text and the note, the body of the footnote in
+nine-point Computer Modern set, the footnote at the bottom of the page
+indented 36 points from the left and 36 points from the right of the rest of
+the body of the text of the document, the footnote body right ragged, and
+the text of the document right justified and in 10 point Computer Modern.
+The \footnoteformat block is modified thus:
+
+\footnoteformat{\skipbeforedivider{18pt}
+ \footnotedivider{144pt}
+ \textreferencefont{\ninepoint\rm}
+ \notereferenceposition{up}
+ \notereferencefont{\ninepoint\rm}
+ \everyfootnote{\rightragged\pin{0pt}
+ \psk{12pt}\ninepoint
+ \leftindent{36pt}\rightindent{36pt}}}
+
+Note that \ninepoint was specified within both the \textreferencefont and
+\everyfootnote markups. The \textreferencefont determines the font that the
+
+footnote reference number is to be printed in. The \everyfootnote markup
+determines the font that the footnote text is to print in at the bottom
+of the page. Most often the fonts specified in \textreferencefont and
+\everyfootnote are the same font.
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+This markup modifies the style of the \autofootnote markup, not the
+\footnote markup.
+ The \footnoteformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if
+both are used.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotem.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..caeff296f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotem.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|FNOTE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\footnoteformat and if you are using \monospace. This affects
+how \autofootnote prints, not how \footnote prints.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotep.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c0997c3c8f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotep.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|FNOTE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\footnoteformat and if you areã|notã%using \monospace. This affects
+how \autofootnote prints, not how \footnote prints.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/font.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/font.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3d6b584379
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/font.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| font |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|user markup name and font nameã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \font markup can be used to allow you to make use of a specific font
+available on your printer. You should always consult the font catalog for
+the fonts available on your printer. The name given in the font catalog
+goes where font name is with the \font markup. The user markup name you
+must provide. It should be a unique name.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To use the fourteen point Sonoran Roman, you can assign it to the markup
+name \bigfont by entering,
+
+\font \bigfont = sonr14
+
+\bigfont Palouse Region:
+
+and you will get:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Palouse Region: |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To use the ten point Computer Modern Sanserif Demibold Condensed you can
+assign it to a markup name \demifont by entering,
+
+\font \demifont = cmssdc10
+
+\demifont Palouse Region:
+
+you will get:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Palouse Region: |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \font markup does not change the interline skip. A font established
+with \selectspecificfont does.
+ This markup is described further in The TEXbook.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontm.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontm.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..16ef399cb3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontm.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|FONT-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to change the default
+\monospace font. You usually shoudn't have to do this.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontp.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontp.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c39de10783
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontp.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|FONT-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to change the default
+proportional space font. You might want to do this if you want to have
+a FONT-P TEXBLOCK on your own disk to be included for each job.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/footnote.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/footnote.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b9135f7c0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/footnote.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| footnote |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|first parameter = reference mark
+ second parameter = footnote textã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \footnote markup can be used to create marked footnotes. There are two
+parameters; the first is the reference mark, and the second is the text of
+the note itself. Each parameter is surrounded with curly braces ({}). If
+more than one reference mark is used on the same page, they should appear in
+the prescribed order:
+ * asterisk (*)
+ * dagger (\dagger)
+ * double dagger (\ddagger)
+ * section sign (\S)
+Refer to the example in the TEXT1 Users' Guide or Reference Manual for
+real sample output. These characters are not available at your terminal.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Using the above prescribed order, the second footnote on a page would be
+entered with \footnote as:
+
+by Achilles Chert\footnote{\dagger}{pH.d., Litmus Sci.
+The author is with the School of Pyroclastic
+Philosophy at the University of Piedmont.}.
+\par
+\nin "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert
+Camus, a novelist who lionized the labors of
+Sisyphus in moving the igneous concretion up the
+declivitous landmass.
+
+In the document, the text would print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| by Achilles Chert . |
+| "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, a novelist who |
+| lionized the labors of Sisyphus in moving the igneous concretion up the |
+| declivitous landmass. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+At the bottom of the page the footnote would print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| pH.d., Litmus Sci. The author is with the School of Pyroclastic |
+| Philosophy at the University of Piedmont. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \footnoteformat has no effect on \footnote. \footnoteformat is used to
+change the style of the \autofootnote markup.
+
+ You cannot use \footnote within \settabs, \vbox, \hbox,
+\drawbox, \paragraphbox, \label, \part, \chapter, \centerline, \halign,
+\rightlinesbegin, or \centerlinesbegin.
+ Refer to the The TEXbook for more on the \footnote markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frac.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frac.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e46eaba641
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frac.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| fraction |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\fracã%
+
+Parameters: ã|numerator/denominatorã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \fraction markup is another method of specifying a fraction. If you
+enter "@1\over2@" you get " 1 2 ". Entering "1/2" will give you "1/2". To
+get "1/" you specify "\fraction1/2 ~".
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Consider my favorite breakfast recipe:
+
+\tabskip 3em plus 2em minus 2em
+\halign{\lft{#}&\lft{#}\cr
+\multispan2\ctr{\bd Muckles}\cr
+3 eggs&beaten\cr
+1 cp&cream\cr
+1 cp&flour\cr
+
+\fraction1/4 t&baking powder\cr
+1 T&sugar\cr
+\multispan2\lft{pinch of salt}\cr
+\multispan2\lft{bacon (optional)}\cr}
+Heat butter or bacon in frying pan.
+Pour all of
+the batter into the pan. Cook @ approximately @
+10 minutes at 375@^\circ@. Cut into pieces
+and serve hot with plenty of syrup.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Muckles |
+| 3 eggs beaten |
+| 1 cp cream |
+| 1 cp flour |
+| 14 t baking powder |
+| 1 T sugar |
+| pinch of salt |
+| bacon (optional) |
+| Heat butter or bacon in frying pan. Pour all of the batter into the |
+| pan. Cook approximately 10 minutes at 375 degrees. Cut into pieces and |
+| serve hot with plenty of syrup. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+There must be a space following the fraction as you enter it. In the above
+example there had to be a space before the "t&baking powder\cr".
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frenchsp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frenchsp.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fe55209b7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frenchsp.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| frenchspacing |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+By default, TEXT1 will double space after hard punctuation, unless the
+letter prior to the punctuation is a capital letter. To make all
+interword spacing the same, regardless of punctuation, you can enter
+the \frenchspacing markup. This will turn off the extra spacing
+following punctuation for the rest of a document or until TEXT1 sees a
+\nonfrenchspacing markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Consider this bibliographic entry:
+
+\bibentry
+
+Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes
+in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical
+Publications, International.
+
+Without \frenchspacing it might print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. |
+| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+If you had specified \frenchspacing,
+
+\frenchspacing
+\bibentry
+Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes
+in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical
+Publications, International.
+
+it would print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. |
+| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/goodbrea.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/goodbrea.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d5c020dfa7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/goodbrea.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| goodbreak |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \goodbreak markup indicates a good place for page or line breaks. TEXT1
+will then break there only if necessary. This markup must be preceded by a
+\par or vertical skip for a page break.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example will break the page before the last paragraph beginning "The
+comparison may seem", if it comes close to the bottom of the page.
+
+\par
+\nin{\bd Parallels.}
+\par
+
+Consider for a moment rocks and deer.
+Both form cooperative groups that furnish the
+landscape . . .
+The fruits of cooperation depend on conditions of
+the environment.
+\par
+\goodbreak
+The comparison may seem facile, but from deliberate
+oversimplification . . .
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/halign.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/halign.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f3f45f42ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/halign.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| halign |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\halign{ preamble\cr
+ tabular text\cr}
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|preamble, tabular text, submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\lft, \ctr, \rt, \cr, \noalign, \tabskip,
+\omit, \multispan, \phantom, && (column repeat)ã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \halign markup is a way of making tables without tabbing. A preamble,
+or sample line, is included immediately after \halign to act as a template
+for the text in each column. Each successive column in a row begins with an
+ampersand (&). Column descriptions may contain horizontal spaces, indents,
+quads, and horizontal fills. Each column description must have a pound
+
+sign (hash mark, #) which acts as a reference variable, so that text can be
+substituted.
+ The halign is read in its entirety. Every column is treated as a box
+whose width is equal to the largest entry.
+ Besides horizontal mode markup such as \indent, you can use the
+following submarkup in the \halign.
+
+\lft in the preamble will left justify each entry in a column.
+
+\ctr in the preamble will center each entry in a column.
+
+\rt in the preamble will right justify each entry in a column.
+
+\cr marks the end of the preamble, and the end of each row.
+
+\noalign is used outside of the preamble. It allows you to enter vertical
+mode text into a table. You must not end a \noalign with a \cr. For
+example, if you wanted to skip a blank line between two row entries, you
+would use \noalign{\vs{\bl}}:
+
+
+1000&32\cr
+\noalign{\vs{\bl}}
+2000&43\cr
+
+\tabskip puts an equal amount of space (glue) between columns. A
+specification of
+
+\tabskip 20pt plus 15pt minus 10pt
+
+indicates that the each column is set 20 points apart. If after the initial
+try it is determined that the table is still narrower than the width of the
+page, up to an additional 15 points of space is put between columns to try
+and get the table to spread across the entire page. If after the initial
+try of 20 points between each column it is determined that the table is
+too wide to fit on the page, up to 10 points is subtracted from the space
+between each column to try and get the table to fit on the page.
+
+\omit can be used to disable to preamble specification for that column
+and row. \omit only works for one column of one row. For example, if a
+preamble
+
+\halign{\lft{#}&\rt{#}\cr
+
+was specified, then to center a header over a column, you could enter
+
+\omit\ctr{Header 1}&\omit\ctr{Header 2}\cr
+1000&2000\cr
+
+\multispan is used to permit spanning of several columns. For example, if
+you had a preamble of
+
+\halign{\rt{#}&\rt{#}&\rt{#}\cr
+
+and you wanted to center a title over the second and third columns, you
+would enter:
+
+first column&\multispan2\ctr{Spanned title}\cr
+
+\phantom is used in decimal alignment. For example,
+
+00.1234&12.231\cr
+72.8\phantom{000}&1.2\phantom{00}\cr
+
+would print the partial table:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 00.1234 12.231 |
+| 72.8 1.2 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+&& is used to indicate that the following column preamble is to be repeated
+for each of the remaining of columns. For example, if you wanted the first
+column centered, the second column left justified, and the next five columns
+right justified, you could enter
+
+\halign{\ctr{#}&\lft{#}&\rt{#}&\rt{#}&
+ \rt{#}&\rt{#}&\rt{#}\cr
+
+Using the column repeat indicator (&&) you can simplify this to
+
+\halign{\ctr{#}&\lft{#}&&\rt{#}\cr
+
+This specification then says that columns 3, 4, etc. all use the same
+preamble, "\rt{#}".
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example illustrates \omit, \qquad and \tabskip.
+
+\tabskip .5in plus .4in minus .3in
+\halign{\rt{#}&\qquad\lft{#}\cr
+\omit\ctr{Case}&\omit\qquad\ctr{Blast}\cr
+\noalign{\vs{2pt}\hrule\vs{2pt}}
+5000 MT&500\cr
+10000 MT&845--1050\cr }
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| ..........5000.MT.......500............ |
+| 10000 MT 845--1050 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+This example makes use of \multispan, \indent,
+\horizontalspace, \noalign and column repeat (&&).
+
+\tabletitle{Surface Land Temperature (degrees C)\lbr
+Changes after Exchanges}
+\vs{10pt}
+\halign{\indent\lft{#}&\hs{2em}\rt{#}
+ &&\hs{1em}\rt{#}\cr
+Case&\multispan4\ctr{Post Detonations (Days)}\cr
+Megatonnage&20&100&200&300\cr
+\noalign{\vs{10pt}}
+1000&-22&8&7&13\cr
+3000&9&6&8&10\cr
+5000&-7&-26&-20&-11\cr
+10000&-24&-45&-26&-9\cr}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Table 1 |
+| Surface Land Temperature (degrees C) |
+| Changes after Exchanges |
+| |
+| |
+| Case Post Detonations (Days) |
+| Megatonnage 20 100 200 300 |
+| |
+| 1000 -22 8 7 13 |
+| 3000 9 6 8 10 |
+| 5000 -7 -26 -20 -11 |
+| 10000 -24 -45 -26 -9 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+\halign takes less computer time than \settabs because it is a basic
+TEX command. The advantages to \halign over \settabs are:
+
+ * maximum column widths are calculated automatically; you must measure
+ the longest entry with \settabs.
+ * templates are more versatile than \settabs; repeatable information can
+ be included in the preamble.
+ * greater flexibility.
+ Refer to The TEXbook for more about \halign, \cr, \noalign, \tabskip,
+\phantom, \omit, \multispan, or && (column repeat).
+ You can use \autofootnote, \autoendnote, and \footnote inside of an
+\halign, so long as they are not also inside an \hbox or \vbox.
+ Refer to the description of \leader for an example of using \halign with
+dot leadering.
+ See \strut for row alignment.
+ Do not put a \cr on the same line as \noalign.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hbox.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hbox.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..552ad9c2b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hbox.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| hbox |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|horizontal mode textã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \hbox is a TEX markup which, among several uses, can be used to keep a
+word together, preventing hyphenations. For example,
+
+\hbox{low-cut}
+
+would prohibit hyphenation of "low-cut". It can also be used in math mode
+to switch to the roman font. For example,
+
+@x^{34}+\hbox{lower order terms}@
+
+prints as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| x[34]+lower order terms |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+You cannot use \autoendnote, \autofootnote, or \footnote within an \hbox.
+ You can also specify an \hbox to take up a certain size. For example,
+
+\hbox to 1in{}
+
+would create a box one inch wide. Refer to the discussion of \leader for
+more on this option of \hbox.
+ For more on this markup refer to The TEXbook.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hin.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..227b7b8040
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hin.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| hangingindent |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\hinã%
+
+Parameters: ã|units of measureã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \hangingindent markup sets the amount of space each line in a hanging
+paragraph is indented after the first. The parameter must be a numerical
+value with valid units of measure.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+The first and second hanging paragraph use a hanging indent of 18 points.
+The third paragraph uses a hanging indent of 38 points.
+
+\psk{12pt}
+\hangingindent{18pt}
+\hangingparagraph
+
+BASE. Can mean 'bedrock' in geological terms;
+or 'gross' as a description of human behavior.
+\hangingparagraph
+CLEAVAGE. Refers to the tendency to split along faults;
+or to the position of the female bosom in a low-cut
+dress.
+\hangingindent{38pt}
+\hangingparagraph
+DOMEHEAD. Is material pushing through a formation;
+or an informal epithet for hairless academics.
+\par
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| BASE. Can mean 'bedrock' in geological terms; or 'gross' as a description |
+| of human behavior. |
+| |
+| CLEAVAGE. Refers to the tendency to split along faults; or to the position |
+| of the female bosom in a low-cut dress. |
+| |
+| DOMEHEAD. Is material pushing through a formation; or an informal epithet |
+| for hairless academics. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The hanging indent will remain in effect until changed with another
+\hangingindent markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hof.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hof.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..54d1467d37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hof.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| hyphenoff |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\hofã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+By default, TEXT1 will do hyphenation if necessary to achieve nice line
+breaks. The \hyphenoff markup can be used to disable hyphenation. It will
+remain this way until a \hyphenon is encountered.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+By default, hyphenation begins this example,
+
+Direct Access Storage Device (DASD) is a term for long
+term file and program storage devices. A more common
+term for the same thing is {\it disk}, since the
+actual storage components look like platters or disks.
+
+\par
+\hyphenoff
+The CP Directory entry for each user indicates what
+virtual disks his machine will include. Each disk
+is known by its {\it virtual address}. In general,
+users will have one 191 virtual disk.
+\par
+\hyphenon
+
+will print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Direct Access Storage De- |
+| vice (DASD) is a term for long |
+| term file and program storage |
+| devices. A more common term |
+| for the same thing is disk, |
+| since the actual storage com- |
+| ponents look like platters or |
+| disks. |
+| The CP Directory entry |
+| for each user indicates what |
+| virtual disks his machine will |
+| include. Each disk is known |
+| by its virtual address. In |
+| general, users will have one |
+| 191 virtual disk. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Compare this output to that of the \hyphenon markup on the next page.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hon.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hon.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b2513733f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hon.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| hyphenon |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\honã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+By default, TEXT1 will do hyphenation if necessary to achieve nice line
+breaks. The \hyphenoff markup can be used to disable hyphenation. It will
+remain this way until a \hyphenon is encountered.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+First print a paragraph without hyphenation and then turn hyphenation on.
+
+\hyphenoff
+Direct Access Storage Device (DASD) is a term for long
+term file and program storage devices. A more common
+term for the same thing is {\it disk}, since the
+
+actual storage components look like platters or disks.
+\par
+\hyphenon
+The CP Directory entry for each user indicates what
+virtual disks his machine will include. Each disk
+is known by its {\it virtual address}. In general,
+users will have one 191 virtual disk.
+
+will print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Direct Access Storage |
+| Device (DASD) is a term for |
+| long term file and program |
+| storage devices. A more |
+| common term for the same thing |
+| is disk, since the actual |
+| storage components look like |
+| platters or disks. |
+| The CP Directory entry for |
+| each user indicates what vir- |
+| tual disks his machine will |
+| include. Each disk is known |
+| by its virtual address. In |
+| general, users will have one |
+| 191 virtual disk. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+
+Compare this output with the example for \hyphenoff on the previous page.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hp.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b4137ea344
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hp.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| hangingparagraph |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\hpã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \hangingparagraph markup creates hanging paragraphs, which are the
+reverse of normal paragraphs. In a normal paragraph, the first line is
+indented but following lines are full measure wide; in a hanging paragraph
+the first line is a full measure and the runover lines are indented.
+Hanging paragraphs are used for lists, glossaries, and bibliographies. The
+\hangingparagraph markup is placed before each item in the text; a \par
+finishes the series.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\psk{5pt}
+
+\hangingparagraph
+BASE. Can mean 'bedrock' in geological terms;
+or 'gross' as a description of human behavior.
+\hangingparagraph
+CLEAVAGE. Refers to the tendency to split along faults;
+or to the position of the female bosom in a low-cut
+dress.
+\hangingparagraph
+DOMEHEAD. Is material pushing through a formation;
+or an informal epithet for hairless academics.
+\par
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| BASE. Can mean 'bedrock' in geological terms; or 'gross' as a description |
+| of human behavior. |
+| CLEAVAGE. Refers to the tendency to split along faults; or to the position |
+| of the female bosom in a low-cut dress. |
+| |
+| DOMEHEAD. Is material pushing through a formation; or an informal epithet |
+| for hairless academics. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The default indentation for \hangingparagraph is 24 points. Use the
+\hangingindent markup to change this indentation.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hrule.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hrule.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3ba7e489ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hrule.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| hrule |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|dimensionã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \hrule markup draws a horizontal rule across the width of the page. It
+is a native TEX markup, and the usage is different in that the parameter is
+not surrounded with curly braces. If you do not supply a dimension, TEXT1
+will print the rule across the entire width of the text. By default, the
+rule drawn has a thickness (height) of .4pt.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted to draw a three inch rule across the page, followed later with
+a rule across the entire width of the page and ending with a thicker rule
+across the width of the page you could specify:
+
+\nin Basic Techniques
+
+\hrule width 3in
+Editing a File
+\hrule
+The Column Pointer
+\vs{2pt}
+\hrule height 2pt
+
+You would get:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| ........................................................................... |
+| ........................................................................... |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Refer to The TEXbook for more on \hrule and how to use the "depth" parameter
+with the "height" and "width" parameters.
+ Use \rule instead of \hrule if you are using \monospace.
+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hs.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4e75ab6b32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hs.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| horizontalspace |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\hsã%
+
+Parameters: ã|units of measureã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The amount of blank space in a line can be varied by the \horizontalspace
+markup. This markup works only within the current line; no space will be
+carried over if too little remains at the end of the line.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+Our barbecues are brick. Our poetry is concrete:
+\bqb\nin
+\horizontalspace{84pt}pillow tectonics
+\hs{48pt}during sleep
+\hs{18pt}pillows come together
+
+\hs{24pt}and move apart
+\hs{18pt}like continental plates
+\hs{36pt}mountain ranges
+\hs{18pt}rise and fall
+\hs{24pt}oceans
+\hs{18pt}rise and fall
+\bqe
+\nin Like Gypsum Lee Ooze, art mimics geology.
+\par
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Our barbecues are brick. Our poetry is concrete: |
+| |
+| pillow tectonics during sleep pillows come |
+| together and move apart like continental plates |
+| mountain ranges rise and fall oceans rise and fall |
+| |
+| Like Gypsum Lee Ooze, art mimics geology. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+\horizontalspace can be used in \settabs and \halign.
+ If you are using \monospace, then the units of measure should be
+specified in tenths of an inch or in em's.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hsize.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hsize.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9eaca127ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hsize.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| hsize |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|dimensionã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \hsize markup is a native TEX markup that can be used to change the
+width of the text on the printed page. This markup does not use delimeters.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you were entering text in a \vbox and you wanted it printed in a 3 inch
+column instead of the default column width you could specify "\hsize=3in".
+For example,
+
+Forms for reader's comments are provided at the back
+of this publication. You can help us continue to improve
+the quality of our documentation, and we welcome all
+comments and suggestions.
+
+\vs{\bl}
+\vbox{\hsize=3in
+Forms for reader's comments are provided at the back
+of this publication. You can help us continue to improve
+the quality of our documentation, and we welcome all
+comments and suggestions.}
+
+will print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Forms for reader's comments are provided at the back of this |
+| publication. You can help us continue to improve the quality of |
+| our documentation, and we welcome all comments and suggestions. |
+| |
+| Forms for reader's |
+| comments are provided at the |
+| back of this publication. |
+| You can help us continue to |
+| improve the quality of our |
+| documentation, and we welcome |
+| all comments and suggestions. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/incl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/incl.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3b2f58acbf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/incl.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| include |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\inclã%
+
+Parameters: ã|page segment nameã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \include markup will include external page segment files, into a TEXT1
+document. Page segments come from graphics generating programs such as
+those produced by GDDM, SAS and MEGACALC. Refer to the GDDM Page Segment
+Generation for the IBM 3820 User Note, U-419, for details on how to create a
+page segment.
+
+ The format for the \include markup is:
+
+\include{fn}
+
+ Where fn is the filename of the file to be included into the text
+document. It must have a filetype of "PSEG3820". You must leave space
+after the page segment to prevent the image from overprinting the following
+text of the document.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+A file called "GRAPH1 PSEG3820 A" contains a SAS/GRAPH image. It is 2 1 2
+inches high, so you would enter:
+
+. . . in the graph illustrated below:
+\par
+\include{graph1}
+\vs{3.5in}
+\noindent
+Notice the values on the Y axis, they . . .
+
+In the document you would get:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| . . . in the graph illustrated below: |
+| |
+| |
+| WWW W WWW SSSSSS UUU UUU |
+| WWW WWW WWW SSSSS UUU UUU |
+| WWWWWWW SSSSSS UUU UUU |
+| WWWWW SSSSSSSS UUUUUUUUUU |
+| |
+| |
+| Notice the values on the Y axis, they . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Sometimes you may want to center the graph on the page. To do this you
+would subtract the width of the graph from the galleywidth(1) and divide the
+difference by 2; then you would do a horizontal skip of that amount (after
+entering \null. For the above graph, the galleywidth is 25 picas, the width
+of the "graph1" is 19 picas, so the indent is to be 3 picas ( 25pc-19pc
+2=3pc ):
+
+| . . in the graph illustrated below: |
+\par
+\noindent\hs{3pc}
+\include{graph1}
+\vs{3.5in}
+\noindent
+Notice the values on the Y axis, they . . .
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ 1. galleywidth=page width - left margin - right margin
+
+In the document you would get the same graph as above, centered on the page.
+Refer to the example below:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| . . . in the graph illustrated below: |
+| |
+| WWW W WWW SSSSSS UUU UUU |
+| WWW WWW WWW SSSSS UUU UUU |
+| WWWWWWW SSSSSS UUU UUU |
+| WWWWW SSSSSSSS UUUUUUUUUU |
+| |
+| |
+| Notice the values on the Y axis, they . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/indent.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/indent.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..42c0fbb071
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/indent.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| indent |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \indent markup creates an empty box of horizontal space whose width is
+the current value of \paragraphindent. This markup is useful in tabular
+work.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\tabletitle{Flea Deaths (in millions)}
+\halign{\indent\rt{#}&\qquad\lft{#}\cr
+Case&Blast\cr
+5000 MT&500\cr
+10000 MT&845--1050\cr }
+\rule
+
+\vs{\bl}
+These statistics are fairly conclusive. Note,
+however, that inconsistencies occurred at . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Table 1 |
+| Flea Deaths (in millions) |
+| |
+| Case Blast |
+| 5000 MT 500 |
+| 10000 MT 845--1050 |
+| ........................................................................... |
+| These statistics are fairly conclusive. Note, however, that |
+| inconsistencies occurred at . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/index.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/index.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6d262cedb2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/index.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|INDEXã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\indexformat.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/input.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/input.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4ab3365aa4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/input.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| input |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|filenameã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \input markup indicates a file to be included in the source. The
+parameter, a CMS file name with a filetype of TEX, follows \input and a
+separator space; no curly braces are used.
+ Usually the \input markup is used in a "driver" file, which calls parts,
+chapters, etc. to create (or drive) the entire document, such as a thesis.
+At the top of such a driver file is where you would put modifications to
+default format blocks, additional font specifications, and your own markup
+definitions.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+In this example, the file is to have a filename of "DRIVER". It calls all of
+the various parts of a 2 chapter document. When formatting, specify DRIVER
+as the filename.
+
+\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\newpage
+ \cl{\bd \chaptertitle}
+ \vs{1\bl}}
+ \incontents{yes}}
+\selectfontset{cm9}{ninepoint}{default}
+\input preface
+\input abstract
+\input chapter1
+\input chapter2
+\input bibliog
+\input append-a
+\input append-b
+\input index
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+If you want to input a file with a filetype other than TEX, you can do so by
+adding the filetype after the filename and placing a period between the two.
+For example, to input a filename of DATA and a filetype of LISTING, enter
+
+\input data.listing
+
+ Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/isk.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/isk.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..56ed4190d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/isk.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| interlineskip |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\iskã%
+
+Parameters: ã|unit of measureã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The spacing between lines (from one baseline to the next, not "single" or
+"double spacing") can be changed using the \interlineskip markup. TEXT1
+automatically sets an interline skip usually 2 points greater than the font
+size when you use \selectfontset.(1) The default font size is 12 points and
+the default interline skip is 14 points. This may be particularly helpful
+when using some of the smaller fonts. In general, the shorter the line or
+smaller the type, less interline skip is needed.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+ 1. Extra space is referred to as leading, pronounced leding (from the
+days when lead was used).
+
+\interlineskip{11pt}
+The definition of Sociogeology is the study of the
+geological basis of all social behavior.
+It explains human behavior by empirical description
+of the attributes of mineral composition.
+\par
+\interlineskip{13pt}
+It is most successful when it provides detailed
+description of particulate phenomena and first-order
+correlations with features . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| The definition of Sociogeology is the study of the geological basis of |
+| all social behavior. It explains human behavior by empirical description |
+| of the attributes of mineral composition. |
+| It is most successful when it provides detailed description of |
+| particulate phenomena and first-order correlations with features . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+\singlespace and \doublespace are dependent on the current setting of
+\interlineskip. For example, the \doublespace leading when \interline-
+skip{12pt} is 24pt.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/it.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/it.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4055cb1bbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/it.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| italic |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\itã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \italic markup sets an Italianate typeface, used for showing emphasis,
+conveying a message, attracting attention, or even creating a mood. Italic
+type is also good for contrast, and it is also hard to read over large
+areas. For printers that do not have italics, underscoring will be used
+instead.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+earlier;
+\italic Japan \roman in Southeast Asia (previously in
+China, now in the Philippines,
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| earlier; Japan in Southeast Asia (previously in China, now in the |
+| ----- |
+| Philippines, |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+members communicate important things---{\it
+hunger, alarm, rank, and sexual desire}---among
+themselves by means of nonsyntactical signals.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| members communicate important things---hunger, alarm, rank, and sexual |
+| ------ ----- ---- --- ------ |
+| desire---among themselves by means of nonsyntactical signals. |
+| ------ |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/italicfa.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/italicfa.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4c0ecd3117
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/italicfa.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \italicface (\it) MARKUP |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \italicface (\it) markup will switch to the italic face text font and print
+the text following the markup in italics. If the printer does not have an
+italic font, a warning will issued and an underscore font will be substituted.
+
+The format for the \italicface markup is:
+
+ \italicface ttttt
+
+Everything from the \italicface markup to the next font change will be printed
+in italics. If only a word or two are to be printed in italics enclose the
+italic face markup and the text that is to be printed in italics within a set
+of braces.
+
+ {\italicface ttttt}
+
+After printing the specified text in italics, TEXT1 will automatically switch
+back to the standard face, or Roman font.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/item.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/item.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..abd96b000b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/item.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| item |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|identifierã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \item markup creates unique indented items. The parameters for this
+markup is an identifier, such as an Arabic number or letter, supplied by
+you. This offers more flexibility.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+militarily for thousands of years.
+Reasons for this continued behavior include:
+\item{*} the rapaciousness of society
+(as shown by the accumulation of wealth and the
+indifference to the poor and nonaggressive)
+\item{**} the acceptance of war
+\item{***} the economic advantages of large-scale
+operations (as shown in industrial applications)
+\par
+\noindent
+The cultures of industrial nations are based on
+unethical . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| militarily for thousands of years. Reasons for this continued behavior |
+| include: |
+| * the rapaciousness of society (as shown by the accumulation of wealth |
+| and the indifference to the poor and nonaggressive) |
+| ** the acceptance of war |
+| *** the economic advantages of large-scale operations (as shown in |
+| industrial applications) |
+| The cultures of industrial nations are based on unethical . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The indentation for \item is determined by the current setting of paragraph
+indent. Each \item forms a hanging paragraph after the identifier. There
+is no extra space between items.
+ Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ix.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ix.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cb92f5efea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ix.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,311 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| index |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\ixã%
+
+Parameters: ã|title textã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\subentry, \blindentry, \uspn, \bdpn, \itpnã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \index markup builds index entries which can be sorted and printed at
+the end of a document. The \index markup has the format
+
+\indexn{entry}
+
+where "n" is the index number (1, 2, or 3), and "entry" is the index
+entry. The page number you are on when the \index markup is inserted will
+be printed with the "entry". You must use the \printindex markup to sort
+and print the index. It comes at the end of the document. Refer to the
+documentation of \printindex for details on this markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Consider this index example:
+
+The files you create and change have a filemode of A.
+This means that they are all kept in a collection of
+files called your A-disk. The FILELIST command
+displays a list of all
+\index1{A-disk}
+the files on your A-disk.
+
+In the document, the following would print where the index markup occurred,
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| The files you create and change have a filemode of A. This means |
+| that they are all kept in a collection of files called your A-disk. The |
+| FILELIST command displays a list of all the files on your A-disk. |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+If this occurred on page 32, the entry in the index printed with
+\printindex1 would print as illustrated on the next page.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| A-disk, 32 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+You cannot use \index within a \settabs or \halign.
+
+ã|Lower Level or Sub entriesã%
+
+ If you want to record a subentry to a main index entry you use the
+\subentry markup within the \index markup.
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \subentry markup is only valid when used within \index.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you had a main entry called "reader list" and you wanted sub entries for
+"receiving a file" and "replacing a file" you could enter the \index markup
+as illustrated here:
+
+\sha{Receiving a File}
+To receive a file, move the cursor to the line that
+describes the file you want to receive.
+\index1{reader list \subentry1{receiving a file}}
+Then press PF9. A notice will appear on that line
+telling you that the file has been received, . . .
+\sha{Replacing or Renaming a File}
+What happens if the file in your reader has the same file
+label as one you already have on your disk?
+There are two ways to handle this.
+\lib\lil1
+If you want the file in your reader to replace the file
+\index1{reader list \subentry1{replacing a file}}
+on your disk, type the command "receive / (replace".
+\lil1
+
+If you want to keep the file on your disk, then rename
+the file in your reader with the command "receive / newname
+\index1{reader list\subentry1{renaming a file}}
+newtype" where "newname" is the new file name and
+"newtype" is the new filetype.
+\lie
+
+This would produce the following paragraph in a document:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Receiving a File |
+| To receive a file, move the cursor to the line that describes the file |
+| you want to receive. Then press PF9. A notice will appear on that line |
+| telling you that the file has been received, ... |
+| |
+| Replacing or Renaming a File |
+| What happens if the file in your reader has the same file label as one |
+| you already have on your disk? There are two ways to handle this. |
+| 1. If you want the file in your reader to replace the file on your disk, |
+| type the command "receive / (replace". |
+| 2. If you want to keep the file on your disk, then rename the file |
+| in your reader with the command "receive / newname newtype" where |
+| "newname" is the new file name and "newtype" is the new filetype. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+If list level #2 printed at the top of page 33, the index entries would look
+like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| reader list |
+| receiving a file, 32 |
+| renaming a file, 33 |
+| replacing a file, 32 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|Excluding Text from the Sortã%
+ There are occasions when you will want text to print in an indexed item,
+but you do not want that text to be a part of the sorting process. For
+example, you may want to index the title "Consumer Guides" including the
+quotes, but you want it sorted with the C's and not sorted with the double
+quote marks. Also, you probably would want to sort \par with the p's, and
+not with the backslashes. Both can be accomplished using the \sortasmarkup
+which can only be used within the \index markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Using the input,
+
+Please get a copy of the article "Consumer Guides" and
+\index1{"Consumer Guides"\sortas{Consumer Guides}}
+refer to the illustration on page 5.
+\par
+Be sure to index the paragraph command "\\par"
+\index1{\\par\sortas{par}}
+somewhere in the document.
+
+you would get the following two paragraphs in your document.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Please get a copy of the article "Consumer Guide References" and refer |
+| to the illustration on page 5. |
+| |
+| Be sure to index the paragraph command "\par" somewhere in the |
+| document. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The index entries would print like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| "Consumer Guides", 45 |
+| contour Maps, 23 |
+| |
+| \par, 45 |
+| Paragraphs, long, 16 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Prepositions in a subentry may not be part of the sort, but are to be
+printed in the index. For example, to get the index to look like,
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| vacations |
+| on boats, 32 |
+| at the Olympian, 21 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+you would use the \index, \subentry, and \sortas commands illustrated on the
+next page.
+
+Some people spend their vacations at older
+hotels like the Olympian.
+\index1{vacations \subentry1{at the
+Olympian\sortas{Olympian}}}
+
+Another popular vacation is travelling the
+Pacific in a boat.
+\ix1{vacations\subentry1{on
+ boats\sortas{boats}}}
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+As another example, "10 Downing Street" is typically sorted with the T's
+and not prior to the 2's. This can also be accomplished using the \sortas
+markup. For example, the Prime Minister's address mentioned earlier would
+be entered as:
+
+Taxi, please take me to 10 Downing Street.
+
+\index1{10 Downing Street\sortas{ten Downing Street}}
+
+ã|Highlighted Page Numbersã%
+ For those applications which require some of the page numbers to be
+printed in bold, some in italics, and others underscored, there are three
+markup available to do this. They are \boldpagenumber, \italicpagenumber,
+and \underscorepagenumber. They are all used within the \index markup, and
+indicate to TEXT1 that a page number other than the standard page number is
+to be used.
+ We recommend that important references be noted in bold (\boldpage-
+number). Fleeting references be printed with italics (\italicpagenumber).
+And primary references be indicated by being underscored (\underscorepage-
+number). Of course, you are free to use these three markup as you see
+fit.
+ The bold page number will always come prior to a standard face reference
+to the same page.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you had an \boldpagenumber on page 43 and \index's on pages 42--44 for
+"peace."
+
+\index1{peace} % Located on page 42
+
+\index1{peace} % Located on page 43
+\index1{peace\bdpn} % Located on page 43
+
+\index1{peace} % Located on page 44
+
+the index printed with \printindex would look like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| peace 43, 42--44 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you have an underscored page number and it falls in the same range as a
+standard face entry, the underscored entry would follow the standard face
+entry. For example, if you had a \underscorepagenumber on page 66 and
+\index's on pages 66--72 for "nationalism",
+
+\index1{nationalism\uspn} % On page 66
+\index1{nationalism} % On page 66
+\index1{nationalism} % On page 67
+\index1{nationalism} % On page 72
+
+the index sequence would print like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| Quick Programming Language 66--72, 66 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you have an index reference in italics and it falls in the same range as
+a standard face entry, the italics entry will not be printed. For example,
+if you had an italics entry using \italicpagenumber on pages 45 and 56, and
+you had standard face entries on pages 54--60 for "In Search of Excellence",
+the printed index would look like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| In Search of Excellence 45, 54--60 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|Cross Referencesã%
+ Often it is desirable to have a cross reference to another index entry.
+You can do this using the \blindentry markup within the \index markup. You
+cannot use both \blindentry and \subentry within the same \index markup.
+The \blindentry markup has the format,
+
+\blindentry{blind entry}
+
+where "blind entry" is the text you want associated with that index entry.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+For example, to get an index entry to print like
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| Flow of control, see Control Structures |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+you would enter
+
+\index1{Flow of control\blindentry{see Control
+Structures}}
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+It is also possible to have a blind entry printed with an index entry, and
+still have it indexed with page numbers. For example, if you were to enter
+
+\index1{Label\uspn}
+\index1{Label\blindentry{({\it see also} Case Label)}}
+
+on page 78 you would get an index entry printed as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| Label, 78, (see also Case Label) |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+If you have page numbers and a blind entry, then the blind entry will follow
+the last page number as illustrated here.
+
+ã|Multiple Indexesã%
+ You can have multiple indexes by changing the "1" in \index1 to "2" or
+"3". For example,
+
+\index1{entry in first index}
+\index2{entry in second index}
+\index3{entry in third index}
+
+will generate one entry in each of three indexes. See \printindex for
+instructions on how to print out each of the three indexes.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ixf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ixf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a57b8f352b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ixf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,260 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| indexformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\ixfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\respectcase, \style, \leadering, \everyhang,
+\everyletterbreak, \indentsubentry, \everyindexã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The defaults listed above for each markup applies initially to each of
+the three indexes. One or more indexes' defaults can all be changed
+by modifying the \indexformat markup. The complete description of the
+\indexformat markup and its related submarkup is:
+
+\indexformatn{format}
+
+where n is the index (1, 2, or 3) and format is the submarkup.
+
+ã|respectcaseã% ignores the case of an index entry. This markup can only be
+used within the \indexformat markup. If you wanted case respected and have
+the lower case letters sorted before the upper case entries (i.e., "boat"
+sorted before "Bed") then enter
+
+\respectcase{yes}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Respecting case applies to all letters. If \respectcase{yes} has been
+specified, then "boat" and "cat" will both be sorted before "Bed". The
+default value is \respectcase{no} for each of the 3 indexes.
+
+ã|styleã% regulates the general index format. \style{indent}, the default,
+indents each index entry. This style looks like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Constantinople, 12, See also Istanbul |
+| alien rule of, 20 |
+| Arab invasion of, 19, 31 |
+| Crusades and, 22, 57 |
+| Ottoman conquest of, 29--31 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ There are two other styles to choose from: "paragraph" and "dash". The
+style "paragraph" is a run-on hanging paragraph. You get it by specifying:
+
+\indexformat1{\style{paragraph}}
+
+With this style, the above index would look like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Constantinople, 12, alien rule |
+| of, 20, Arab invasion of, 19, |
+| 31, Crusades and, 22, 57, |
+| Ottoman conquest of, 29--31, See |
+| also Istanbul |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Note that with this style, the blind entry from the \blindentry submarkup
+comes after the subentry, instead of after the main entry as was done for
+the "indent" style.
+ The third style is "dash", an em-dash style. You get it by specifying
+
+\indexformat1{\style{dash}}
+
+It is very similar to the default "indent" style, except subentries are
+prefaced with an em dash following the initial indent of space.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Constantinople, 12, See also Istanbul |
+| ---alien rule of, 20 |
+| ---Arab invasion of, 19, 31 |
+| ---Crusades and, 22, 57 |
+| ---Ottoman conquest of, 29--31 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|leaderingã% turns on/off dot leadering. The default is "off". You
+can change this default only within the \indexformat markup. To have dot
+leadering, enter:
+
+\ixf1{\leadering{yes}}
+
+If you are using \style{indent} and \leadering{yes} you get:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Constantinople, See also |
+| Istanbul ... . ... ... . ....12 |
+| alien rule of ... . ... 20 |
+| Arab invasion of . . .19, 31 |
+| Crusades and .... . .22, 57 |
+| Ottoman conquest of .29--31 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Do not use dot leadering with \style{paragraph}.
+
+ã|everyletterbreakã% is what will be printed between each letter break,
+(i.e. between "A" and "B"). By default, one blank line is skipped when
+starting a new letter (at each letter break). The \everyletterbreak markup
+can only appear within the \indexformat markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+You could modify the default to place a rule and skip between breaks:
+
+\ixf1{\everyletterbreak{\vs{\bl}
+ \hrule width 2in
+ \vs{\bl}}}
+
+ This would look something like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| ..................... |
+| alpha, 62 |
+| America, 38 |
+| Austria, 55 |
+| ..................... |
+| |
+| Bach, 98 |
+| Bethlehem, 87 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Something else you can do with indexes is to make use of the "\nextletter"
+submarkup, which gives you the next uppercase character about to be listed
+in the sorted index list. For example, between "apple" and "boat" the
+value of "\nextletter" would be "B". One application would be to print the
+"\nextletter" in a large type. This could be accomplished by changing the
+default for "\everyletterbreak" to:
+
+\indexformat{\everyletterbreak{\vs{\bl}
+ \noindent{\twelvepoint\bd\nextletter}\par}}
+
+The resulting index would look like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| A |
+| alpha, 62 |
+| America, 38 |
+| Austria, 55 |
+| |
+| B |
+| Bach, 98 |
+| Bethlehem, 87 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Another variation of the above would be to draw a box around the next
+letter. You could do this by adding \drawbox to \everyletterbreak:
+
+\ixf1{\everyletterbreak{\vs{\bl}
+ \drawbox{\bd\nextletter}\par}}
+
+and you will get an index that prints as illustrated on the next page.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| ..... |
+| ..... |
+| alpha, 62 |
+| America, 38 |
+| Austria, 55 |
+| |
+| ..... |
+| ..... |
+| Bach, 98 |
+| Bethlehem, 87 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The "\nextletter" is always an uppercase letter.
+ Only letters, not numbers or special characters such as the backslash
+(\) are used as \nextletter.
+
+ã|indentsubentryã% There are two levels of subentries available. The amount
+of distance they are indented when you are using the "indent" or "dash"
+styles is controlled by the \indentsubentry submarkup. If you are using
+the "paragraph" style for the index, the \indentsubentry is ignored. The
+definition of this markup is,
+
+\ixf1{\indentsubentryn{amt}}
+
+where n is the subentry level, 1 or 2, and amt is the amount to be indented.
+The default indent for these two subentry levels is:
+
+\ixf1{\indentsubentry1{1em}
+ \indentsubentry2{2em}}
+
+ If, for example, you were using the "indented" style and wanted each
+subentry level indented two em's from the previous level, you would enter,
+
+\ixf1{\indentsubentry1{2em}
+ \indentsubentry2{4em}}
+
+which would print the index illustrated earlier as:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Constantinople, 12, See also Istanbul |
+| alien rule of, 20 |
+| Arab invasion of, 19, 31 |
+| Crusades and, 22, 57 |
+| Ottoman conquest of, 29--31 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|everyhangã% controls the hanging indent for the primary index level and
+each of the two subentry levels. If you had an index entry with many page
+numbers,
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Write state- |
+| ment, 26, |
+| 34--38, 70, |
+| 86, |
+| 103, 191, |
+| 202, 203-- |
+| 204, 281 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The hangingindent would be 1.5em by default.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted to increase that value to 3em, you would enter,
+
+\ixf1{\everyhang{3em}}
+
+and you would get:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Write state- |
+| ment, 26, |
+| 34--38, |
+| 70, 86, |
+| 103, 191, |
+| 202, 203-- |
+| 204, 281 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|everyindexã% is a list of one or more commands to be executed before
+printing the sorted index. By default, \tenpt is the value of \everyindex.
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The default type style used with \monospace is \roman instead of \tenpt.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ju.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ju.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..48b4541b3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ju.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| justify |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\juã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \justify markup makes each line exactly the same length and aligns
+both left and right margins vertically. TEXT1 automatically sets pages
+with full justification by default. The \justify markup is used to reset
+justification after using \rightragged or \leftragged.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\rightragged
+Setting: Continuation of the narrative of Nehemiah
+(c. 420 {\caps b.c.}).
+Supplies information on an important epoch in ancient
+
+Jewish history---the return to Judea after seventy
+years of captivity in Babylon.
+\justify
+Consists of two parts separated by several years:
+Chapters 1 to 6, the return of the first caravan under
+leadership of Zerubbabel; chapters 7 to 10, an
+expedition, sixty years later, conducted by Ezra.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Setting: Continuation of the narrative of Nehemiah (c. 420 b.c.). |
+| Supplies information on an important epoch in ancient Jewish history---the |
+| return to Judea after seventy years of captivity in Babylon. |
+| Consists of two parts separated by several years: Chapters 1 to 6, |
+| the return of the first caravan under leadership of Zerubbabel; chapters 7 |
+| to 10, an expedition, sixty years later, conducted by Ezra. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+When you specify \justify, text will be justified until TEXT1 sees a
+\rightragged or \leftragged.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/la.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/la.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fce94d1349
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/la.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| label |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\laã%
+
+Parameters: ã|textã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \label markup creates labelled paragraphs. Labels will appear to the
+left of the paragraph described, in a 72 point (one inch) zone. A label is
+similar to a hanging paragraph, except that the first line is aligned with
+the indented portion and the label is separated by a gutter of 1 em space.
+The skip between labels is one blank line. To begin a new paragraph at the
+same indentation as the previous label, enter "\label{}" with no entry in
+the parameter field of the \label.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+origin of rock provides clues.
+\label{Sedimentary} rock is recemented from
+
+particles of older rock that has been broken down
+by physical and chemical weathering.
+\label{Metamorphic}
+rock is igneous or sedimentary that has been
+altered by temperature and pressure.
+\la{}
+Human cells act in a manner like sedimentary rock.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| origin of rock provides clues. |
+| Sedimentaryrock is recemented from particles of older rock that has been |
+| broken down by physical and chemical weathering. |
+| |
+| Metamorphicrock is igneous or sedimentary that has been altered by |
+| temperature and pressure. |
+| Human cells act in a manner like sedimentary rock. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The label indent and the gutter width can be modified with the \labelformat
+markup
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/label.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/label.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..362b463298
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/label.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|LABELã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\labelformat.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/laf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/laf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..748b10c7c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/laf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| labelformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\labelformat{\skipbefore{1\bl}
+ \labelwidth{72pt}
+ \gutter{1em}
+ \everylabel{\rm}
+ }
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\lafã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \labelwidth, \gutter,
+\everylabelã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \labelformat markup controls the appearance of labelled paragraphs.
+
+\skipbefore indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a
+block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips.
+
+\labelwidth sets the amount of space to contain the label to the left of
+the paragraph. The shaded portion illustrated here is the "label width"
+area:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| SCALE, |
+| nmin, nmax fornhalfwordxdata.)nteSince pixeledifferences5can(rangeabetween |
+| -255 and +255 (-511 and . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The default label width is 72 points (one inch). To change to a label width
+of 1 2 inch you would enter,
+
+\labelformat{\labelwidth{.5in}}
+
+\gutter keeps a small amount of space between the label and the paragraph.
+The shaded portion illustrated on the next page is the "label gutter" area.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| SCALE, |
+| nmin, nmax fornhalfwordxdata.)nteSince pixeledifferences5can(rangeabetween |
+| -255 and +255 (-511 and . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The default amount is 1 em space. To change to a label gutter of 5 points
+you would enter,
+
+\labelformat{\gutter{5pt}}
+
+\everylabel determines the type face and size of the label itself. The
+default is roman face and right ragged.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+The sample markup reduces the skipbefore amount, increases the labelwidth
+(to suit a larger format), and changes the font for labels to 9 point bold.
+Note the use of displayed math mode.
+
+\selectfontset{cm9}{ninepoint}{default}
+\labelformat{\skipbefore{6pt}
+ \labelwidth{108pt}
+ \gutter{1em}
+ \everylabel{\ninepoint\bd}}
+\label{HALF}
+specifies that both input datasets are halfword
+(maximum 511 DN) (default is byte data).
+\la{ADD} specifies that the sum of the two input
+datasets is to be computed (default is the
+computation of the difference image).
+
+\la{SCALE, nmin, nmax}
+nmin and nmax are integers between -255 and 510
+(-511 and 1022 for halfword data.) Since . . .
+\la{}
+If N(I,J) is less than nmin, the OUTPUT=0.\lbr
+If N(I,J) is greater than nmax, the OUTPUT=K.\lbr
+If N(I,J) is between or equal to nmin and nmax then
+@@OUTPUT = K*{N(I,J)-nmin\over nmax-nmin}@@
+where N(I,J) = IN1(I,J) - IN2(I,J) or if "ADD" has
+been specified, N(I,J) = IN1(I,J) + IN2(I,J)
+and K = 255 (511 for halfword data).
+\la{TRANS\lbr sl1, ss1, sl2, ss2}sl1 and ss1 are
+line and sample
+coordinates for a point in IN1, and sl2 and ss2 are the
+corresponding coordinates for the point in IN2. If HALF
+has been specified, ss1 and ss2 refer to {\it bytes}
+(not sample) in IN1 and In2, respectively.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| HALF specifies that both input datasets are halfword (maximum |
+| 511 DN) (default is byte data). |
+| ADD specifies that the sum of the two input datasets is to |
+| be computed (default is the computation of the difference |
+| image). |
+| |
+| SCALE, nmin, |
+| nmax 1022 for halfword data.)rsSincewe.n.-.55 and 510 (-511 and |
+| If N(I,J) is less than nmin, the OUTPUT=0. |
+| If N(I,J) is greater than nmax, the OUTPUT=K. |
+| If N(I,J) is between or equal to nmin and nmax then |
+| OUTPUT = K*N(I,J)-nmin nmax-nmin where N(I,J) = IN1(I,J) - |
+| IN2(I,J) or if "ADD" has been specified, N(I,J) = IN1(I,J) |
+| + IN2(I,J) and K = 255 (511 for halfword data). |
+| |
+| TRANS |
+| sl1, ss1, sl2,IN1, and sl2 and ss2 are the corresponding coordinates for |
+| ss2 the pointsinaIN2.inIfaHALFahasebeenrspecified,rss1pandtss2 |
+| refer to bytes (not sample) in IN1 and In2, respectively. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lbr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lbr.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4982e67f9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lbr.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| linebreak |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\lbrã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \linebreak markup causes a line to finish without interrupting a
+paragraph. Occasionally it is necessary to break a line in a precise place
+within a paragraph, as opposed to letting TEXT1 decide where to break the
+line. This markup does not end a paragraph, it simply starts the following
+text of the paragraph on a new line instead of concatenating it to the end
+of the previous line.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This article is an outline of the codification of
+Sociogeology into a branch of evolutionary geology.
+The subject has an aggregate of self-sufficient
+
+concepts that with such disciplines as cosmetology
+and astrology. Figure 1 shows a
+schema borrowed from my previous book,\linebreak
+{\it The Intact Societies: Vestals and Volcanoes},\lbr
+which suggests how the amalgam can be achieved.
+Geologists have always been intrigued by comparisons
+between societies of rocks and those of vertebrates,
+between two kingdoms.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| This article is an outline of the codification of Sociogeology into |
+| a branch of evolutionary geology. The subject has an aggregate of |
+| self-sufficient concepts that with such disciplines as cosmetology and |
+| astrology. Figure 1 shows a schema borrowed from my previous book, |
+| The Intact Societies: Vestals and Volcanoes, |
+| which suggests how the amalgam can be achieved. Geologists have always |
+| been intrigued by comparisons between societies of rocks and those of |
+| vertebrates, between two kingdoms. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+See \break for the difference between these two markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/leader.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/leader.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e34179520b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/leader.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| leader |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \leader markup is most often used in the \tableofcontentsformat in
+conjunction with a page number. It produces dot leadering. You can also
+use \leader in an \halign.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example using leaders also illustrates the use of \indent in \halign.
+
+The average annual costs of owning buildings in terms of
+{\it taxes, insurance, maintenance,} and
+{\it depreciation} are:
+\halign{\indent\indent\hbox to 13pc {#\leader}&
+ \rt{#}\ \%\cr
+
+Taxes&1.00\cr
+Insurance&.75\cr
+Maintenance repairs&2.00\cr
+Depreciation&4.00\cr
+Miscellaneous&.25\cr
+\indent\bd Total&8.00\cr}
+
+Will print:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| The average annual costs of owning buildings in terms of taxes, |
+| insurance, maintenance, and depreciation are: |
+| Taxes . .... .. .....1.00 % |
+| Insurance ... . ... ..75 % |
+| Maintenance repairs . 2.00 % |
+| Depreciation. . . ... 4.00 % |
+| Miscellaneous. . .... .25 % |
+| Total ... . ... 8.00 % |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Notice in the last line the the ampersand (&) acted as a font delimiter for
+the \bd which printed "Total".
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/letter.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/letter.helpmode
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..754e174b0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/letter.helpmode
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|LETTERã%model is a general letter model. It is a template. You may modify
+it, but it is recommended you check with the Information Center first.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lib.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lib.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..251f2203c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lib.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| listbegin |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\libã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \listbegin markup starts a series of items set off with numbers,
+letters, or bullets (raised dots). The \listbegin markup ends the previous
+paragraph.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+Some nations have historically dominated others.
+\par
+\listbegin
+\bul United States in Latin America (and the Pacific)
+\bul Europe in Africa (especially England, France,
+
+Germany, the Netherlands---perhaps Portugal and Spain)
+\bul Japan in Southeast Asia (earlier in China, now
+in the Philippines, Borneo, and others)
+\bul Russia in Eastern Europe (and attempts in South
+America and the Caribbean)
+\bul China in Tibet (and most lately in Southeast
+Asia---Campuchea, and Vietnam)
+\listend
+\noindent
+Countries have tried to dominate each other . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Some nations have historically dominated others. |
+| * United States in Latin America (and the Pacific) |
+| * Europe in Africa (especially England, France, Germany, the |
+| Netherlands---perhaps Portugal and Spain) |
+| * Japan in Southeast Asia (earlier in China, now in the Philippines, |
+| Borneo, and others) |
+| * Russia in Eastern Europe (and attempts in South America and the |
+| Caribbean) |
+| * China in Tibet (and most lately in Southeast Asia---Campuchea, and |
+| Vietnam) |
+| Countries have tried to dominate each other . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lie.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lie.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3bc295573f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lie.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| listend |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\lieã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \listend markup finishes a series of items set off with numbers,
+letters, or bullets (raised dots). The \listend returns text to paragraph
+mode.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Reasons for this continued behavior include:
+\par
+\listbegin
+\lil1 armaments (in the form of tanks, bombers, weapons
+and troop carriers, and personnel vehicles)
+\lil1 military forces (the troops and support personnel
+
+necessary to impose policy by force)
+\listend
+\noindent
+The cultures of industrial nations are based on . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Reasons for this continued behavior include: |
+| 1. armaments (in the form of tanks, bombers, weapons and troop carriers, |
+| and personnel vehicles) |
+| 2. military forces (the troops and support personnel necessary to impose |
+| policy by force) |
+| The cultures of industrial nations are based on . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lif.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lif.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ed5b99e21a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lif.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| listformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\listformat{\skipbefore{0\bl}
+ \liststyle{1.,a.,i.,1),a),i),(1)}
+ \everylistlevel1{\rm\lin{36pt}\gutter{1em}}
+ \everylistlevel2{\rm\lin{58pt}\gutter{1em}}
+ \everylistlevel3{\rm\lin{79pt}\gutter{1em}}
+ \everylistlevel4{\rm\lin{101pt}\gutter{1em}}
+ \everylistlevel5{\rm\lin{122pt}\gutter{1em}}
+ \everylistlevel6{\rm\lin{144pt}\gutter{1em}}
+ \everylistlevel7{\rm\lin{166pt}\gutter{1em}}
+ \everybullet{\rm\lin{+36pt}\gutter{1em}}
+ \skipafter{0\bl}}
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\lifã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \everylistleveln, \everybullet,
+\skipafter, \liststyleã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \listformat markup permits changes to the TEXT1 ordered list style, list
+indentation, or other formatting of an outline list.
+
+ã|\skipbeforeã% indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a
+list. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips.
+
+ã|\liststyleã% sets the order of identifiers for the seven levels of a list.
+Up to seven list styles may be entered in the \liststyle markup, each
+separated by commas. The complete collection of possible list level styles
+is:
+
+ "1.", "a.", "A.", "i.", "I.", "1)", "a)", "A)", "i)", "I)",
+ "(1)", "(a)", "(A)", "(i)", "(I)", "1]", "a]", "A]", "i]", "I]",
+ "[1]", "[a]", "[A]", "[i]", "[I]"
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Note that every listlevel does not have to be changed or entered.
+
+\listformat{\skipbefore{0pt}
+ \liststyle{1.,a),(1)}}
+
+If your terminal does not have square brackets, you can use the \leftsquare-
+bracket and \rightsquarebracket markup within the \liststyle markup. For
+example:
+
+ \liststyle{\lsb1.\rsb, a.}
+
+ã|\everylistleveln{Nested Markup}ã% The "n" indicates the list level number,
+from 1 to 7. Each of the seven list levels has its own \everylistlevel
+markup. The default indentation increases for each level down. You may use
+Nested Markup such as font changes, \leftindent, \rightindent, and \gutter.
+
+ * \leftindent is the distance from the left margin to the start of the
+text of the item. The left indent is the shaded portion illustrated below:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| a. The "computer on a chip" has made it possible to extend automation |
+| to the office place. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ * \gutter is the distance between the list level indicator and the text of
+the item. The gutter is the shaded portion illustrated below:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| a. The "computer on a chip" has made it possible to extend automation |
+| to the office place. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|\everybullet{Nested Markup}ã% Bullets can be used by themselves in a list
+or after any level. If you wanted to change this default to have a right
+ragged bullet with 36-point left and right indents, you would specify:
+
+\listformat{\skipbefore{0pt}
+ \everybullet{\rightragged\lin{36pt}\rin{36pt}}
+ \skipafter{0pt}}
+
+ã|\skipafterã% indicates how much space is to be skipped after printing a list.
+This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Assuming you wanted the text to be right justified and double spaced in a 10
+point Computer Modern font and the list levels to be right ragged and single
+spaced in a 9 point Computer Modern font, the \listformat could be entered
+as illustrated on the next page.
+
+\sfs{cm9}{ninept}{default}
+
+\listformat{\skipbefore{0pt}
+ \liststyle{1.,a.,i.,1),a),i),(1)}
+ \everylistlevel1{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{24pt}}
+ \everylistlevel2{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{.8in}}
+ \everylistlevel3{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{1.1in}}
+ \everylistlevel4{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{1.4in}}
+ \everylistlevel5{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{1.7in}}
+ \everylistlevel6{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{2.0in}}
+ \everylistlevel7{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{2.3in}}
+ \skipafter{0pt}}
+
+. . . bridge specifications: |
+\lib\lil1 Falsework under all spans shall be completely
+released before forms are constructed and concrete is
+placed in rail bases and traffic and pedestrian barriers.
+\lil1 In order to determine the condition of column concrete,
+forms shall always be removed from columns before releasing
+supports from beneath beams and girders.
+\lie
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| . . . bridge specifications: |
+| 1. Falsework under all spans shall be completely released before forms |
+| are constructed and concrete is placed in rail bases and traffic and |
+| pedestrian barriers. |
+| 2. In order to determine the condition of column concrete, forms shall |
+| always be removed from columns before releasing supports from beneath |
+| beams and girders. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lil.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lil.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..101297f484
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lil.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| listlevel |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\lilnã%
+
+Parameters: ã|n, 1 to 7ã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+TEXT1 provides seven levels of list enumeration. The levels in a list are
+each designated with a \listlevel markup; each level is differentiated with
+a list level number n, 1 to 7. To specify an outline list, start with the
+\listbegin markup followed by \listlevel, and ending with a \listend. Each
+\listlevel will indent an absolute amount from the left margin. The default
+indentation for level 1 is 36 points ( 1/2 inch); level 2 is 58 points; and
+each level increases.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\lib
+\lil1 Humans vs. rocks.
+
+\lil2 Rocks are food source for humans.
+\lil3 Igneous
+\lil3 Metamorphic
+\lil2 Humans are food source for rocks.
+\lil1 Rocks vs. humans.
+\lie
+\nin Only more research can dig up facts for solving . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 1. Humans vs. rocks. |
+| a. Rocks are food source for humans. |
+| i. Igneous |
+| ii. Metamorphic |
+| b. Humans are food source for rocks. |
+| 2. Rocks vs. humans. |
+| Only more research can dig up facts for solving . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Each \listlevel must have a beginning \listbegin and an ending \listend.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lin.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..df27e80960
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lin.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| leftindent |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\linã%
+
+Parameters: ã|unit of measureã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \lin markup indents text from the left margin. The value may be
+relative, e.g., {+.5in}, which adds (or subtracts) the amount from the
+current left margin or current indent (if one is in effect). The default
+for left indent is zero. The indentation remains until another \leftindent
+overrides it. This markup causes a break in text.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+from Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom,
+because of the inevitability of entropic direction.
+\vs{9pt}
+\leftindent{+1in}
+
+What I have read doesn't make any sense. How can
+minerals influence human social behavior, any more
+than gravity? This theory is 'on the rocks.'
+\par
+\leftindent{-1in}
+\rightline{Clay Gneiss}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| from Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom, because of the |
+| inevitability of entropic direction. |
+| What I have read doesn't make any sense. How can minerals |
+| influence human social behavior, any more than gravity? This |
+| theory is 'on the rocks.' |
+| Clay Gneiss |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+
+You can also use grouping to limit the effects of the \leftindent. If you
+do, be sure that the last paragraph to be indented is followed by a \par.
+The above illustration could also have been accomplished with grouping as
+illustrated on the next page.
+
+from Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom,
+because of the inevitability of entropic direction.
+\vs{9pt}
+{\leftindent{+1in}
+What I have read doesn't make any sense. How can
+minerals influence human social behavior, any more
+than gravity? This theory is 'on the rocks.'
+\par
+}
+\rightline{Clay Gneiss}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| from Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom, because of the |
+| inevitability of entropic direction. |
+| |
+| What I have read doesn't make any sense. How can minerals |
+| influence human social behavior, any more than gravity? This |
+| theory is 'on the rocks.' |
+| Clay Gneiss |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/line.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/line.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e10d568d60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/line.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| line |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \line markup is used most often in the \runningheadformat and \running-
+footformat running title markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted to left justify "Chapter 1" and right justify "page 2" (where
+"2" is actually the page number, \pagenumber), enter:
+
+\rhf{\bothpages{
+ \line{\lft{Chapter 1}\rt{page \pagenumber}}}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Chapter 1 page 1 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+A construct such as,
+
+\rhf{\bothpages{
+ \line{\lft{page \pn}\ctr{\today}
+ \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}}}
+
+will not print the date centered on the page:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| page 2 January 13, 1987 PNW Waterfalls |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+To accomplish this, you should print the left and right justified text with
+\line, then space backwards one line (\verticalspace{-\bl}), then center the
+date:
+
+\rhf{\bothpages{\line{\lft{page \pn}
+ \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}}
+ \vs{-\bl}
+ \line{\ctr{\today}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| page 3 January 13, 1987 PNW Waterfalls |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lint.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lint.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1394439251
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lint.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| lineinterval |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\lintã%
+
+Parameters: ã|intervalã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+When \printingnumbers{yes} and \countinglines{yes} have both been specified,
+this markup is used to specify when a line number is to be printed for line
+numbering in the margin of a document. It need only be specified once at
+the top of a document. The default is every fifth line counted will be
+numbered.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted every tenth line counted to be numbered, you would specify:
+
+\lineinterval{10}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is
+ignored for all other printers.
+ You may specify an interval from 0-255. Practically speaking, you
+should specify an interval from 1-150.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lir.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lir.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a872714bb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lir.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| listresume |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\lirã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+\listresume is used to end a lower listlevel and return to the next higher
+listlevel without starting a new point.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\lib
+\lil1 All fixed time controllers shall be equipped with
+indicating switches and wiring to provide local control
+of the following functions:
+\lil2 Transfer from automatic to manual operation,
+\lil2 Transfer from normal operation to flashing,
+\listresume
+
+Combined master and intersection controllers shall have
+indicating switches for functions (b) and (c), above,
+for interconnected system.
+\par
+Combined master and intersection controllers shall also
+have provisions for time switch control.
+\lil1 All fixed-time controllers shall be . . .
+\listend
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 1. All fixed time controllers shall be equipped with indicating switches |
+| and wiring to provide local control of the following functions: |
+| a. Transfer from automatic to manual operation, |
+| b. Transfer from normal operation to flashing, |
+| Combined master and intersection controllers shall have indicating |
+| switches for functions (b) and (c), above, for interconnected system. |
+| Combined master and intersection controllers shall also have |
+| provisions for time switch control. |
+| 2. All fixed-time controllers shall be . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lists.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lists.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9c6016c1d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lists.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|LISTSã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\listformat.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lnf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lnf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..26007a09dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lnf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| linenumberfont |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\lnfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|fontã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+When \printingnumbers{yes} and \countinglines{yes} have both been specified,
+this markup is used to specify what font the line number is to be printed in
+the margin of a document. It need only be specified once at the top of a
+document. The default is font "etsc 8", which is English Times Small Caps
+at 8 point.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted to use Plantin Roman, you would specify:
+
+\linenumberfont{plr 10}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is
+ignored for all other printers.
+ See the Font Catalog to determine what fonts to use.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lr.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bab03a2243
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lr.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| leftragged |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\lrã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \leftragged markup leaves the left margin uneven after formatting. This
+markup is used only with unusual text, for instance, introductory quotes for
+chapters.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\leftragged
+The comparison may seem facile, but from deliberate
+oversimplification comes complex obfuscation and general
+theoretification.
+Behavioral research will lead in this direction, as the
+
+general theory of Sociogeology predicts the features of
+social organization from knowledge of population
+parameters and behavioral constraints imposed by
+the mineral constitution of the species.
+\par
+Humans exhibit metamorphic behavior over time or at high
+temperatures, fever, for instance.
+Metamorphic crystallization involves low temperatures;
+\justify
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Thecomparison mayseemfacile, butfrom deliberateoversimplificationcomes |
+| complex obfuscationandgeneral theoretification.Behavioral researchwilllead |
+| inthis direction,asthe generaltheoryof Sociogeologypredicts thefeaturesof |
+| social organizationfromknowledge ofpopulation parametersandbehavioral |
+| constraints imposedbythe mineralconstitution ofthespecies. |
+| Humansexhibit metamorphicbehaviorover timeor athightemperatures, |
+| fever,forinstance. Metamorphiccrystallization involveslowtemperatures; |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Use \justify to turn the justification back on again.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/markup.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/markup.helpmenu
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..29c37a2849
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/markup.helpmenu
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| Summary of TEXT1 Markup |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ Help may be selected for the following markup by placing the cursor
+under any of the first eight characters of the desired markup abbreviation
+followed bypressing the PF1 key.
+
+Abbreviation Markup Name Function
+
+app \appendix{} designate appendix
+apf \appendixformat{} modify appendix style
+aib \asisbegin start 'as is' text
+aie \asisend end 'as is' text
+aif \asisformat{} modify 'as is' style
+aen \autoendnote{} save endnote
+afn \autofootnote{} add footnote
+bie \bibentry start entry
+bib \bibliography{} designate bibliography
+bif \bibliographyformat{} modify bibliography style
+bqb \blockquotebegin start block quote
+bqe \blockquoteend end block quote
+bqf \blockquoteformat{} modify block quote style
+bd \bold call bold font
+bi \bolditalic call bolditalic font
+break \break force line and page breaks
+bul \bullet start bullet
+cc \caps call caps/small caps font
+cl \centerline{} center one line
+clb \centerlinesbegin begin centering, 'as is'
+cle \centerlinesend end centering
+cents \cents cent sign
+chap \chapter{} designate chapter
+chf \chapterformat{} modify chapter style
+coul \countinglines{} start counting lines
+dsp \doublespace start alternate blank lines
+db \drawbox{} draw a box around text
+dbrs \drawboxrulesize{} thickness of a box's rule
+dbm \drawboxmat{} white space around a box
+die \dumpinsertseject dump and print inserts
+el \ellipsis{} 3 or 4 dot ellipsis
+ep \emptypage print an empty page
+enf \endnoteformat{} modify endnote style
+epm \evenpagemargin used in line numbering
+ex \extension call the extension font
+fig \figure{}{} create a figure
+fif \figureformat{} modify figures
+fixf \fixedformat multiple column format style
+font \font font definition
+footnote \footnote{}{} add footnote
+fnf \footnoteformat{} modify footnote style
+frac \fraction print a fraction
+frenchspacing \frenchspacing spacing for bibliographies
+goodbreak \goodbreak indicate likely page break
+halign \halign table building
+hin \hangingindent set hanging paragraph indent
+hp \hangingparagraph start hanging paragraph
+hbox \hbox TEX horizontal box
+hs \horizontalspace{} add horizontal space
+hrule \hrule draw a horizontal rule
+hsize \hsize set the galleywidth
+hof \hyphenoff turn off hyphenation
+hon \hyphenon turn on hyphenation
+incl \include add an external graphic
+indent \indent add horizontal space
+ix \index add item to index
+ixf \indexformat specify the index format
+input \input input another file
+isk \interlineskip{} set interline skip
+it \italic specify italic font
+item \item unordered lists
+ju \justify align margins
+la \label start a label
+laf \labelformat modify label style
+leader \leader dot leadering
+lin \leftindent{} indent left margin
+lr \leftragged unaligned left margin
+line \line left justify a line
+lbr \linebreak cause unfilled line break
+lint \lineinterval line numbering
+lnf \linenumberfont line numbering
+lib \listbegin start list
+lie \listend end list
+lif \listformat{} modify list style
+lil \listlevel{} start new list level (1-7)
+lir \listresume resume at previous list level
+mn \marginnote print a note in the margin
+mnf \marginnoteformat modify margin note style
+mathdefault \mathdefault establish math fonts
+mi \mathitalic call math italic font
+msp \monospace typewriter printer setup
+mcf \multicolumnformat modify multiple column defaults
+nc \newcolumn start a new column
+np \newpage start a new page
+nobreak \nobreak discourage page break
+nin \noindent suppress paragraph indent
+nonfrenchspacing \nonfrenchspacing turn off french spacing
+ntp \notitlepage suppress title page
+numl \numberinglines line numbering
+opm \oddpagemargin line numbering
+oc \onecolumn one column formatting
+pf \pageformat page size and margins
+pn \pagenumber print page number
+par \paragraph end paragraph
+pb \paragraphbox box a paragraph
+pin \paragraphindent{} set paragraph indentation
+printind \printindex print the document index
+psk \paragraphskip{} set space between paragraphs
+part \part{} designate major heading
+paf \partformat{} modify part style
+plaintexmathon \plaintexmathon use PLAIN.TEX's $
+ppl \poplevel line numbering
+pre \preface{} designate preliminary pages
+prf \prefaceformat{} modify preface style
+pen \printendnotes print accumulated endnotes
+prin \printingnumbers{} line numbering
+pic \putincontents1{} add to the table of contents
+quad \quad add an 'em' of space
+qquad \qquad add two 'em's of space
+raggedbottom \raggedbottom don't align page bottoms
+rin \rightindent{} indent right margin
+rl \rightline{} right justify line
+rlb \rightlinesbegin begin right alignment, 'as is'
+rle \rightlinesend end right alignment, 'as is'
+rr \rightragged unaligned right margin
+rm \roman specify roman font
+rule \rule create horizontal line
+rff \runningfootformat{} specify running foot format
+rhf \runningheadformat{} specify running head format
+sau \sameauthor previous author, bibliography
+sfs \selectfontset{}{}{} specify font set
+sms \selectmathset{}{} specify math set
+ssf \selectspecificfont{}{}{} specify specific font
+san \setappendixnumber{} reset appendix number
+scn \setchapternumber{} reset chapter number
+senn \setendnotenumber{} reset endnote number
+sfn \setfigurenumber{} reset figure number
+sffn \setfootnotenumber{} reset footnote number
+spn \setpagenumber{} reset page number
+sptn \setpartnumber{} reset part number
+ssan \setsubheadanumber{} reset subheada number
+ssbn \setsubheadbnumber{} reset subheadb number
+sscn \setsubheadcnumber{} reset subheadc number
+ssdn \setsubheaddnumber{} reset subheadd number
+stn \settablenumber{} reset table number
+settabs \settabs tables
+ssp \singlespace start single spacing
+strut \strut tables
+sha \subheada{} designate first subheading
+shaf \subheadaformat{} modify first subheading style
+shb \subheadb{} designate second subheading
+shbf \subheadbformat{} modify second subheading style
+shc \subheadc{} designate third subheading
+shcf \subheadcformat{} modify third subheading style
+shd \subheadd{} designate fourth subheading
+shdf \subheaddformat{} modify fourth subheading style
+sy \symbol call the symbol font
+taf \tableformat{} modify table title style
+toc \tableofcontents{} print table of contents
+tocf \tableofcontentsformat{} modify table of contents style
+tat \tabletitle{} print a table title
+tenpt \tenpt call 10pt font set
+text1 \text1 print "TEXT1"
+thc \threecolumns print text in 3 columns
+tp \titlepage designate title page
+tpf \titlepageformat{} modify title page style
+toclbr \toclinebreak cause a line break in the contents
+today \today print current date
+twelvept \twelvept call 12pt font set
+twc \twocolumns print text in 2 columns
+tt \typewriter call typewriter font
+us \underscore{} underline word(s)
+vbox \vbox TEX vertical box
+vs \verticalspace{} leave vertical space
+vsk \verticalspacekeep{} leave vertical space
+vrule \vrule draw a vertical rule
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/marnote.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/marnote.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..13e28e3ece
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/marnote.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|MARNOTEã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\marginnoteformat.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mathdefa.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mathdefa.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9fe869f6a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mathdefa.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| mathdefault |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+By default, TEXT1 establishes a 9 point font for math mode superscripts,
+and a 7 point font for math mode supersuperscripts. This is the value of
+\mathdefault. You can establish other math mode font combinations than 9/7
+by using the \selectmathset markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+You can establish a larger math set called \bigmath which can be used for
+display math and you can switch back to \mathdefault for the text math.
+
+\selectmathset{cm1412m}{bigmath}
+\twelvept
+\mathdefault
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mcf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mcf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f24f22ac48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mcf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,260 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| multicolumnformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\multicolumnformat{
+ \twocolumnwidth{.48\galleywidth}
+ \threecolumnwidth{.31\galleywidth}
+ \twocolumngutter{.04\galleywidth}
+ \threecolumngutter{.035\galleywidth}
+ \columnrulewidth{0.0pt}
+ \skipbefore{6pt plus3pt minus2pt}
+ \skipafter{6pt plus3pt minus2pt}
+ }
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\mcfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\twocolumnwidth, \threecolumnwidth,
+\twocolumngutter, \threecolumngutter, \columnrulewidth,
+\skipbefore, \skipafterã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The column and gutter widths can be changed by modifying the
+\multicolumnformat markup. Column widths are specified in a percentage
+of the \galleywidth, the width of the text area on the page as specified
+in the \pageformat markup. If the default "flexibleformat" is being used
+a skip before and a skip after the multiple column format may also be
+specified. These skips are ignored if you are using \fixedformat.
+
+ã|\twocolumnwidthã% is the width of each column when you specify \twocolumns.
+Each column will be exactly the same width. This width is the shaded area
+illustrated below:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Greek man- from the fourth |
+| uscripts of the to the ninth |
+| Bible fall into centuries, be- |
+| 3 groups (1) Pa- ginning with the |
+| pyri, covering Codex Vaticanus |
+| the period from and the Codex |
+| the third cen- Sinaiticus; (3) |
+| tury b.c. to Vellum minis- |
+| the fourth cen- cules, from the |
+| tury a.d. (2) ninth century |
+| Vellum uncials-- to the inven- |
+| -a form of ma- tion of print- |
+| juscule (large ing, there are |
+| letter)--- well over 4,000 |
+| of various dates manuscripts. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|\threecolumnwidthã% is the width of each column when you specify
+\threecolumns. Each column will be exactly the same width. This
+width is the shaded area illustrated below:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Greek manu- (2) Vellum icanus and |
+| scripts of uncials- the Codex |
+| the Bible --a form Sinaiticus; |
+| fall into of majus- (3) Vel- |
+| 3 groups: cule (large lum minis- |
+| (1) Papyri, letter)-- cules, from |
+| covering -of various the ninth |
+| the period dates from century to |
+| from the the fourth the inven- |
+| third cen- to the tion |
+| tury b.c. ninth cen- of print- |
+| to the turies, be- ing, there |
+| fourth cen- ginning are over |
+| tury a.d. with the 4,000 manu- |
+| Codex Vat- scripts. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|\twocolumngutterã% is the distance between each column when you specify
+\twocolumns. The gutter is the shaded area illustrated below:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Greek man- from the fourth |
+| uscripts of the to the ninth |
+| Bible fall into centuries, be- |
+| 3 groups (1) Pa- ginning with the |
+| pyri, covering Codex Vaticanus |
+| the period from and the Codex |
+| the third cen- Sinaiticus; (3) |
+| tury b.c. to Vellum minis- |
+| the fourth cen- cules, from the |
+| tury a.d. (2) ninth century |
+| Vellum uncials-- to the inven- |
+| -a form of ma- tion of print- |
+| juscule (large ing, there are |
+| letter)--- well over 4,000 |
+| of various dates manuscripts. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|\threecolumngutterã% is the distance between each column when you specify
+\threecolumns. Each gutter will be exactly the same width. The gutter is
+the shaded area illustrated on the next page:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Greek manu- (2) Vellum icanus and |
+| scripts of uncials- the Codex |
+| the Bible --a form Sinaiticus; |
+| fall into of majus- (3) Vel- |
+| 3 groups: cule (large lum minis- |
+| (1) Papyri, letter)-- cules, from |
+| covering -of various the ninth |
+| the period dates from century to |
+| from the the fourth the inven- |
+| third cen- to the tion |
+| tury b.c. ninth cen- of print- |
+| to the turies, be- ing, there |
+| fourth cen- ginning are over |
+| tury a.d. with the 4,000 manu- |
+| Codex Vat- scripts. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|\columnrulewidthã% when set to a non zero value will print a rule between
+each column.
+
+ã|\skipbeforeã% is the distance between the one column text and the multiple
+column text when you are using the flexible method of setting multiple
+columns. The skip is ignored if you are using \fixedformat.
+
+ã|\skipafterã% is the distance between the multiple column text and the one
+column text when you are using the flexible method of setting multiple
+columns. The skip is ignored if you are using \fixedformat.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+You can also specify the column widths in units of measure, instead of a
+percentage of the \galleywidth.
+
+ \multicolumnformat{
+ \twocolumnwidth{10pc}
+ \twocolumngutter{3pc}
+ \columnrulewidth{.25pt}
+
+ \skipbefore{6pt plus3pt minus2pt}
+ \skipafter{6pt plus3pt minus2pt}}
+
+ \twocolumns
+ Greek manuscripts of the Bible fall into 3 groups
+ (1) {\it Papyri}, covering the period from the third century
+ {\caps b.c} to the fourth century {\caps a.d}.
+ (2) {\it Vellum uncials}---a form of majuscule (large
+ letter)---of various dates from the fourth to the ninth
+ centuries, beginning with the {\it Codex Vaticanus} and
+ the {\it Codex Sinaiticus};
+ (3) {\it Vellum miniscules}, from the ninth century to
+ the invention of printing, there are well over
+ 4,000 manuscripts.
+ \onecolumn
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Greek manu- . from the fourth |
+| scripts of the . to the ninth |
+| Bible fall into . centuries, be- |
+| 3 groups (1) Pa- . ginning with the |
+| pyri, covering . Codex Vaticanus |
+| the period from . and the Codex |
+| the third cen- . Sinaiticus; (3) |
+| tury b.c. to . Vellum minis- |
+| the fourth cen- . cules, from the |
+| tury a.d. (2) . ninth century |
+| Vellum uncials-- . to the inven- |
+| -a form of ma- . tion of print- |
+| juscule (large . ing, there are |
+| letter)--- . well over 4,000 |
+| of various dates . manuscripts. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+
+The rule between the columns will not print as long as the column rule width
+is zero.
+ The skip before and skip after are ignored in the optional fixed column
+method. The fixed column format (\fixedformat) always fills the remainder
+of the current page with white space and changes to the new format on the
+following page. Columns may not be balanced in \fixedformat.
+ The \newcolumn markup while in the flexible format estimates the
+remaining space on the page at the time it is entered. If a footnote
+or other insert is placed on the same page after the newcolumn markup the
+length of the blank column cannot be estimated properly. In this case,
+TEXT1 will issue a warning,
+
+overfull \vbox 12pt while \output active
+
+You can compensate for the footnote or insert by subtracting twice the
+amount of the overfull box in two columns or three times this amount in
+triple columns immediately before the newcolumn markup. For example, if the
+box is overfull by 12 points and you are in two columns, enter,
+
+\advance\vsize by-24pt
+\newcolumn
+text
+
+or in three columns before a \newcolumn enter,
+
+\advance\vsize by-36pt
+\newcolumn
+text
+
+This reduces the height of the current page enough to allow space for the
+insert. The height of each column must be reduced by the amount of the
+overfull box warning, or twice the amount for two columns and three times
+the amount for three columns. See The TEXbook for more on \advance.
+ If the newcolumn markup appears on the final page of the document it
+may cause the balance columns routine to fail because one column is the
+full height of the page. Do not change to \fixedformat after entering
+\newcolumn.
+
+ Certain line breaking penalties have been altered in the multiple column
+formats. These penalties, in combination or separately, may cause a short
+column if there are not a sufficient number of places specified to add extra
+space, "glue."
+
+ Single Column Penalties
+\brokenpenalty=100 \clubpenalty=150
+\exhyphenpenalty=50 \hyphenpenalty=50
+\widowpenalty=150 \hbadness=1000
+\tolerance=200
+ Two Columns Penalties
+\brokenpenalty=0 \clubpenalty=0
+\exhyphenpenalty=0 \hyphenpenalty=0
+\widowpenalty=0 \hbadness=6400
+\tolerance=6400
+ Three Columns Penalties
+\brokenpenalty=0 \clubpenalty=0
+\exhyphenpenalty=0 \hyphenpenalty=0
+\widowpenalty=0 \hbadness=9600
+\tolerance=9600
+
+The penalties may be reinstated in the multiple column formats by entering
+each markup with a new value in the text stream immediately after the first
+call for the double or triple column markup. Refer to The TEXbook for a
+discussion of the above penalties.
+ When formatting multiple column text and other large formatting tasks,
+the user may run into trouble by calling for so many format changes that
+the available memory space is overrun. If this happens reduce the number
+of markup used on the page that fails to format. The numbers enclosed in
+angle brackets < 1 > < 2 > < 3 > show how many pages have been completed and
+are printed on the terminal screen as each page is completed. If the macro
+memory was exceeded when < 3 > was the last number in the sequence you would
+know that the memory was exceeded while formatting page four. Your file
+will not print with this error condition.
+ To find the point in your document that exceeded the memory use the
+markup \bye at different places in your file. This markup stops text
+processing. At the point \bye doesn't prevent the error condition you know
+that you have passed page 4 where the error occurred. You may then examine
+the markup before the \bye for possible elimination or find other markup
+that will format properly without overrunning the memory. See The TEXbook
+for more on \bye.
+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/memo.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/memo.helpmode
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e6362b8139
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/memo.helpmode
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|MEMOã%model is a general memo model. It is a template. You may modify it,
+but it is recommended you check with the Information Center first.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mi.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mi.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4e38e59993
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mi.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| mathitalic |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\miã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \mathitalic markup is a font change much the same as \roman or
+\italic. The behavior of the math italic font is quite different from the
+italic. For example, the sequence "This lengthy succession" will print
+as "This lengthy succession" with \italic and "This lengthy succession with
+\mathitalic. This markup is usually used in math mode.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+Control sequences with {\it several
+arguments} require even more {\mi precautions
+than control sequences with one argument.}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Control sequences with several arguments require even more precautions |
+| than control sequences with one argument. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+\mathitalic does not honor interword spacing (the space between words) in a
+sentence.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mn.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..238c713a5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mn.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| marginnote |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\mnã%
+
+Parameters: ã|note textã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+Margin notes can be added to either the left or right side of a page with
+the \marginnote markup. As the name indicates, margin notes are outside the
+defined margin. They are produced, by default, right ragged in a 10 point
+Computer Modern font in the left margin with a width of 60 points and a
+gutter of 12 points.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+. . . a General Systems Theory of geological change. |
+\marginnote{IV.7.4}
+No theory, however, has unified diverse sciences of . . .
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| . . . a General Systems Theory of geological change. No theory, |
+| however, has unified diverse sciences of . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Avoid using \marginnote with \monospace.
+ Refer to the description of the \marginnoteformat markup to find out how
+to change the \marginnote defaults.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mnf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mnf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c6bc4061c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mnf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| marginnoteformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\marginnoteformat{\position{left}
+ \notewidth{54pt}}
+ \notegutter{6pt}
+ \everymarginnote{\tenpt\rr}}
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\mnfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\position, \notewidth, \notegutter,
+\everymarginnoteã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The defaults for the \marginnote markup can be modified with
+\marginnoteformat.
+
+ã|\positionã% by default places the margin note in the margin. You can have it
+placed in the right margin by specifying:
+
+\marginnoteformat{right}
+
+ã|\notewidthã% is the width of the area in the margin used for printing the
+margin note.
+
+ã|\notegutterã% is the width of the area between the margin note and the left
+margin of the text.
+
+ã|\everymarginnote{Nested Markup}ã% can be vertical mode markup such as \right-
+ragged, \leftragged, \justify, and font changes.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Change the margin notes so they print in the right margin in a 7 point font
+with a margin note width of 46 points.
+
+\sfs{cm7}{sevenpt}{default}
+\marginnoteformat{\position{right}
+ \notewidth{46pt}}
+ \notegutter{1em}
+ \everymarginnote{\sevenpt\rm} }
+
+This chapter explains the fundamental steps in preparing
+a file containing ordinary English text. Numerous
+exercises have been interspersed throughout the
+\marginnote{Well, there {\it will} be lots of exercises
+eventually.} text, to clarify certain points,
+or just to provide practice.
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/msp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/msp.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..854d444579
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/msp.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| monospace |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\mspã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+Typestyles may be monospaced, where all letters are the same width, or
+proportionally spaced, where letters are different widths. Typewriter
+printers have only monospaced typestyles; Composing printers have both
+styles available. The default typestyle for TEXT1 is Computer Modern, a
+proportionally spaced typestyle for composing printers. It is not available
+on typewriter printers.
+ The \monospace markup calls the monospaced font and adjusts many TEXT1
+block defaults to fit within the limitations of monospace. For example,
+the amount of space before and after a block quote is increased to whole
+baseline skips, instead of half (monospace only deals with whole lines).
+References for footnotes are placed on the baseline instead of superscripted
+(which is not available in monospace).
+
+ If you specify \italic and you are using \monospace, you will get
+underscores instead of italics, since most typewriter printers do not have
+italics.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\monospace
+As long as human institutions were large and brittle,
+war was an effective way of disassembling them.
+The intellectual rationalization for the continual
+preparation for war is the old Roman adage:
+{\it If you want peace, prepare for war.}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| As long as human institutions were large and brittle, war was an |
+| effective way of disassembling them. The intellectual rationalization for |
+| the continual preparation for war is the old Roman adage: If you want |
+| peace, prepare for war. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Specify the \monospace markup only once. It should be the first markup in
+your file.
+ The markup the \monospace modifies, and their new defaults are as
+follows:
+
+ * The font for the table of contents will print with \roman.
+
+ * \raggedbottom is "on" instead of \normalbottom.
+
+ * \paragraphskip is set to "0pt".
+
+ * \paragraphindent is set to "36pt".
+
+ * The \skipbefore and \skipafter for \asisformat is set to "1\bl" instead
+ of 6 points.
+
+ * The \skipbefore and \skipafter for \blockquoteformat is set to "1\bl"
+ instead of 6 points; the text is indented 36 points instead of 24
+ points; the text is printed in monospace roman instead of 10 point
+ Computer Modern roman.
+
+ * Figure titles are printed monospace bold instead of 10 point Computer
+ Modern bold.
+
+ * Table titles are printed in monospace bold instead of Computer Modern
+ 12 point bold.
+
+ * Endnotes are printed with no extra space, except paragraph skip,
+ between notes instead of 4 points as is the non \monospace default; The
+ note is printed in monospace roman instead of Computer Modern 10 point;
+ The text of the note is not indented, instead of the default 1.2em
+ indentation.
+
+ * Autofootnotes are printed down instead of superscripted; Their style is
+ "(1)" instead of "1" in monospace roman instead of Computer Modern 10
+ point; At the bottom of the page the note carries a paragraph indent of
+ 20 points instead of .5in.
+
+ * Heading markup, such as \part, \chapter, \subheada, etc. are printed
+ in monospace instead of Computer Modern 12 point.
+
+ * The running head is defined to use monospace instead of Computer Modern
+ 12 point.
+
+If you want to change any of the defaults for the above mentioned markup,
+they must come after the \monospace markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/multicol.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/multicol.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..88473bcd09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/multicol.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|MULTICOLã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\multicolumnformat for 2 or 3 columns.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nc.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c8463b8ade
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nc.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| newcolumn |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\ncã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+When using \twocolumns or \threecolumns, there may be times when an author
+wants to force TEXT1 to break a column at a point other than at the bottom
+of a page. This can be done by entering the \newcolumn markup. Any
+column in the double or triple column formats can be broken by inserting the
+\newcolumn (\nc) markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This was accomplished by entering the \newcolumn markup between the desired
+list entries while in \twocolumns
+
+\twocolumns
+\hangingparagraph
+
+Ehrlich, P. et al. 1984. {\it Cold and the Dark}.
+New York: W.~Norton.
+\hangingparagraph
+Osborn, E. 1962. (personal message).
+\newcolumn
+\hangingparagraph
+Roszak, T. 1972. {\it Where the Wasteland Ends}.
+New York: Harper & Row.
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Ehrlich, P. et Roszak, T. 1972. |
+| al. 1984. Where |
+| Cold and the the Wasteland |
+| Dark. New Ends. New |
+| York: York: Harper |
+| W. Norton. & Row. |
+| Osborn, E. 1962. |
+| (personal |
+| message). |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+This markup has the same effect as \newpage if you are in a printing in one
+column instead of multiple columns.
+ If you are in multiple columns and you want to go to the next page, use
+\newpage instead of \newcolumn.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nin.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..52e0ac3f16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nin.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| noindent |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\ninã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+Paragraph indentation can be suspended for the following paragraph by
+placing a \noindent markup at the beginning of the first line. A paragraph
+following a block quote or following a title is often not indented.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\lib
+\lil1 the economic advantages of large-scale operations
+(as shown in industrial applications)
+\listlevel2 armaments (in the form of tanks, bombers,
+weapons and troop carriers, and personnel vehicles)
+\listlevel2 military forces (the troops and support
+
+personnel necessary to impose policy by force)
+\listend
+\noindent
+The cultures of industrial nations are based on
+accumulations of materials.
+\par
+Questions about defining . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 1. the economic advantages of large-scale operations (as shown in |
+| industrial applications) |
+| a. armaments (in the form of tanks, bombers, weapons and troop |
+| carriers, and personnel vehicles) |
+| b. military forces (the troops and support personnel necessary to |
+| impose policy by force) |
+| The cultures of industrial nations are based on accumulations of |
+| materials. |
+| Questions about defining . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nobreak.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nobreak.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..078a6418fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nobreak.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| nobreak |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+You can discourage TEXT1 from breaking a page at a certain point by using
+\nobreak. It should be preceded either by a \verticalspace or a \paragraph.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example tells TEXT1 to keep the title "Leached Samples" on the same
+page as "Table 6 gives . . . ".
+
+\cl{\bd Leached Samples}
+\vs{\bl}
+\nobreak
+Table 6 gives the compositions of the leached
+samples as reported by x-ray fluorescence analysis
+
+(XRF). Using silica content as an internal standard,
+the relative amounts of each element removed can be
+calculated. These too are shown in Table 6.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Leached Sample |
+| |
+| Table 6 gives the compositions of the leached samples as reported by |
+| x-ray fluorescence analysis (XRF). Using silica content as an internal |
+| standard, the relative amounts of each element removed can be calculated. |
+| These too are shown in Table 6. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nonfrenc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nonfrenc.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..73157c7f9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nonfrenc.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| nonfrenchspacing |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+By default, TEXT1 will double space after punctuation, unless the letter
+prior to the punctuation is a capital letter. To make all interword spacing
+the same, regardless of punctuation, you can enter the \frenchspacing
+markup. This will turn off the extra spacing following punctuation for the
+rest of a document or until TEXT1 sees a \nonfrenchspacing markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you had specified \nonfrenchspacing to turn off french spacing,
+
+\nonfrenchspacing
+\bibentry
+
+Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes
+in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical
+Publications, International.
+
+it might print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. |
+| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Compare this to the same bibliography entry printed with \frenchspacing:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. |
+| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/np.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/np.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ee4040fd74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/np.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| newpage |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\npã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \newpage markup stops formatting the current page, leaving the remainder
+blank (footnotes or bottom titles will print as expected), and starts a new
+page with the text following the markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+The following example would print "Bibliography" at the top of the next
+page.
+
+The rock should be left at the bottom, because of
+the inevitability of entropic direction.
+\par
+
+\newpage
+\centerline{\bd Bibliography}
+\hp
+Grabens, G. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes in
+the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical
+Publications International.
+\hp
+Illite, I. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's
+Stone." {\it Mining Truth}. 11:455--601.
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+If you are in \twocolumns and you specify \newpage while in the first
+column, the second column will be left blank. If you are in \threecolumns
+and you specify \newpage while in the first column, the second and third
+columns will be left blank.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ntp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ntp.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7a6c62959f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ntp.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| notitlepage |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\ntpã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+By default, you always get a title page as the first page of your document.
+If you want running titles on the first page, put the \notitlepage markup at
+the top of the source. Then the first line of the \runningheadformat will
+be the first line to appear at the top of the first and subsequent pages.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\rhf{\bothpages{\line{\ctr{\today}}}}
+\notitlepage
+\rightlinesbegin
+J.R. Bays
+
+P.O. Box 2021 CS
+Pullman, WA 99163
+\rightlinesend
+\vs{2\bl}
+\centerline{\bd Nuclear Utopia}
+\vs{2\bl}
+Nuclear war is unthinkable.
+Limited disarmament is unworkable.
+Environmental degradation is unconscionable.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| January 13, 1987 |
+| |
+| J.R. Bays |
+| P.O. Box 2021 CS |
+| Pullman, WA 99163 |
+| |
+| |
+| Nuclear Utopia |
+| |
+| |
+| Nuclear war is unthinkable. Limited disarmament is unworkable. |
+| Environmental degradation is unconscionable. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/numl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/numl.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a71e31704a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/numl.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| numberinglines |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\numlã%
+
+Parameters: ã|statusã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+This markup is used to start numbering lines for line numbering in the
+margin of a document. Status is true or false.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To start line numbering you enter
+
+\numberinglines{true}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is
+ignored for all other printers.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/oc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/oc.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0b3e8cdf0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/oc.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| onecolumn |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\ocã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+If you have specified \twocolumns or \threecolumns, single column text can
+be formatted again by entering the \onecolumn markup. For example, if an
+author wants to change from a single column to two columns he enters the
+\twocolumns markup where the two column text begins and \onecolumn or \oc
+markup where the single column text begins again.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+The \twocolumns markup places the bullets in two columns. And \onecolumn
+returns text to a single column.
+
+\twocolumns\listbegin
+\bul {\it Russia} in Eastern Europe (and in
+
+South America and the Caribbean)
+\nc
+\bul {\it China} in Tibet (and most lately in Southeast
+Asia---Campuchea, and Vietnam)
+\listend
+\onecolumn
+\noindent
+Countries have tried to dominate each other
+economically and militarily for thousands of years.
+Reasons for this continued behavior include . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| * Russia in * China in Ti- |
+| Eastern Eu- bet (and |
+| rope (and in most lately |
+| South Amer- in South- |
+| ica and the east Asia--- |
+| Caribbean) Campuchea, |
+| and Vietnam) |
+| |
+| Countries have tried to dominate each other economically and militarily |
+| for thousands of years. Reasons for this continued behavior include |
+| . . . |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+\onecolumn has no effect if you are already in one column.
+ If you are in \fixedformat, \onecolumn will do a \newpage before
+starting one column formatting.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/opm.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/opm.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..657fa0e915
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/opm.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| oddpagemargin |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\opmã%
+
+Parameters: ã|measurementã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+This markup is used to indicate where a document's line numbering is to be
+printed on odd numbered pages. The default is 407.7 points from the left
+edge of the paper on odd pages.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To indicate that you want line numbering to start at 1 inch from the left
+edge, you would enter at the beginning of your document:
+
+\oddpagemargin{1in}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is
+ignored for all other printers.
+ Valid values for \oddpagemargin are 0 to 2 to the power of 32 points,
+practical values are 5 to 860 points.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..851a5e290e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| partformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\partformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject\titlepage
+ \hrule height 0pt depth 0pt
+ \vfil
+ \centerline{\twelvept\bd
+ Part \partnumber}
+ \centerline{\twelvept\bd \parttitle}
+ \setchapternumber{0}
+ \setsubheadanumber{0}
+ \setsubheadbnumber{0}
+ \setsubheadcnumber{0}
+ \setsubheaddnumber{0}
+ \setfootnotenumber{0}
+ \setendnotenumber{0}
+ \setfigurenumber{0}
+ \settablenumber{0}
+ }
+
+ \incontents{yes}
+ }
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\pafã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \partformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that control the
+appearance of the part title. Following are the submarkup descriptions.
+
+ã|numberingstyleã% allows you to change the style from Arabic numerals, the
+default (1), to capital letters (A) or roman numerals (I). If you wanted
+your parts in roman numerals, you would specify:
+
+\partformat{\numberingstyle{I}}
+
+ã|titleformatã% controls the appearance of the part title banner. You may
+use markup such as \newpage, \dumpinsertseject \verticalspace, and \center-
+line within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within
+or outside of \partformat:
+ ã|partnumber.ã% prints the most recent part number.
+ ã|parttitle.ã% prints the most recent part title.
+ ã|hrule height 0pt depth 0pt.ã% is used to create a half title page
+along with \vfil.
+
+ã|incontentsã% places the part title in contents (if one is printed).
+Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no."
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example does not create a half title page. Instead the part starts a
+new page, centers the title bold, and one line is skipped afterwards before
+printing the text of the part.
+
+\partformat{\titleformat{\newpage
+ \cl{\bd \parttitle}
+
+ \vs{1\bl}
+ }}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \partformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are
+used. See The TEXbook for more on \vfil.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagem.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9e08994304
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagem.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|PAGE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\pageformat, page dimensions and margins for this \monospace job.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagep.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7b17e6276d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagep.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|PAGE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\pageformat, page dimensions and margins for thisã|nonã%\monospace job.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paper.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paper.helpmode
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..51c7b221ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paper.helpmode
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|PAPERã%model is a general paper model. It is a template. You may modify
+it, but it is recommended you check with the Information Center first.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/par.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/par.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1a4a9c500f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/par.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| paragraph |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\parã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+A paragraph is a composition consisting of a group of sentences dealing with
+a single topic. A paragraph is commonly indicated by beginning on a new
+line and indenting the first line.
+ The TEXT1 program is paragraph-oriented, that is, it reads an entire
+paragraph before breaking it into lines. Because TEXT1 reads by paragraphs,
+the \paragraph markup comes at the end of a paragraph, instead of the
+beginning. Thus, to end a paragraph, enter the \paragraph markup (or a
+blank line) on the last line of text or on a line by itself, which makes it
+easier to spot paragraphs in the source.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This sample shows the relation of text to markup.
+
+\psk{5pt}\pin{10pt}
+I raised it in order to characterize the
+essence of Sociogeology. Will Durant recognized that
+civilization existed by consent of geology---subject
+to change without notice.
+\paragraph
+The definition of Sociogeology is the study of the
+geological basis of all social behavior.
+It explains human behavior by empirical description
+of the attributes of mineral composition.
+It is most successful when it provides detailed
+description of particulate phenomena and first-order
+correlations with features of the physical
+environment.
+
+One of its primary functions is to reformulate the
+shaky foundations of social sciences in a way that
+draws them into a modern synthesis with the hard
+sciences.
+
+\par
+This article is an outline of the codification of
+Sociogeology into a branch of evolutionary geology.
+The subject has an aggregate of self-sufficient . . .
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+| |
+| I raised it in order to characterize the essence of Sociogeology. Will |
+| Durant recognized that civilization existed by consent of geology--- |
+| subject to change without notice. |
+| The definition of Sociogeology is the study of the geological basis of |
+| all social behavior. It explains human behavior by empirical description |
+| of the attributes of mineral composition. It is most successful when |
+| it provides detailed description of particulate phenomena and first-order |
+| correlations with features of the physical environment. |
+| |
+| One of its primary functions is to reformulate the shaky foundations of |
+| social sciences in a way that draws them into a modern synthesis with the |
+| hard sciences. |
+| This article is an outline of the codification of Sociogeology into |
+| a branch of evolutionary geology. The subject has an aggregate of |
+| self-sufficient . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+A blank line also ends a paragraph. For this reason, blank lines may be
+used in place of \paragraph markup.
+ Paragraphs are not permitted in math mode; they cause errors. Blank
+lines will also cause errors in math mode.
+ The distance between paragraphs is determined by the \par-
+agraphskip markup. The default value for \paragraphskip is
+"0 points plus 3 points minus 0 points". The "plus/minus" specification
+allows up to 3 additional points to be added between paragraphs to get the
+bottom of each page to line up properly is you are using \normalbottom.
+ The indent at the beginning of each paragraph is determined by the
+\paragraphindent markup. The default value for indentation is 24 points.
+ For a complete discussion of how paragraphs are read in and formatted,
+refer to The TEXbook.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parm.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parm.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4164a4a16a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parm.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|PAR-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify
+\paragraphindent, \paragraphskip, \justify, or \hypenon.
+The defaults given are for \monospace jobs.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parp.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parp.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d3d2f1de79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parp.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|PAR-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify
+\paragraphindent, \paragraphskip, \justify, or \hypenon.
+The defaults given areã|notã%for \monospace jobs.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..771ae0c672
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|PARTã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\partformat.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..eee751234e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| part |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|titleã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \part markup starts a new page, centers the title in 12 point Computer
+Modern bold, and enters the title in the table of contents. Furthermore,
+the \part markup places the part title in the center of a blank page (called
+a half-title page). Parts are numbered. Each heading markup can be used as
+often as necessary.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example would print the title "Human Sciences" on a half title page,
+then skip to a new page where it begins the paragraph "Humanity is still
+ . . ."
+
+in order.
+
+\part{Human Sciences}
+\newpage
+Humanity is still the measure of . . .
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+To change how a part looks, use the \partformat markup.
+ If you are using \monospace, the part title is printed in monospace bold
+instead of Computer Modern 12 point bold.
+ Each time you enter \part, the chapter number and subhead numbers are
+reset to zero.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pb.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..629dae4e29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pb.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| paragraphbox |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\pbã%
+
+Parameters: ã|textã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+Whole paragraphs can be put into a \drawbox if you use \vbox with the
+\drawbox. The resulting box will extend into the left and right margins by
+the sum of the \drawboxmat and \drawboxrulesize. If you use \paragraphbox{
+| . . } instead of \drawbox{\vbox{ . . . }}, the paragraph size is reduced |
+such that the box will fit within the current margins.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This illustrates the difference between a paragraph boxed with \paragraphbox
+and \drawbox.
+
+ \paragraphbox{{\it The Journal of Nonrepeating
+ Results} is published by the Center for Unpleasant
+
+ Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for
+ articles are assigned to and held by the authors.}
+ \drawbox{\vbox{The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena
+ is the research arm of Giga Geologicals, Inc. No apologies
+ are tendered for the nonverifiability of experiments.
+ The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy.}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |.
+| ........................................................................... |.
+| . The Journal of Nonrepeating Results is published by the Center |.
+| . for Unpleasant Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for |.
+| . articles are assigned to and held by the authors. |.
+| ........................................................................... |.
+| . The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm of Gig |.
+| . Geologicals, Inc. No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability o |.
+| . experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy. |.
+| ........................................................................... |.
+| |.
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Do not use this markup if you are using \monospace.
+ Do not use \paragraphbox around more than one page of formatted
+material.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pen.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pen.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7c2523f3cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pen.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| printendnotes |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\penã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+To print the endnotes accumulated with the \autoendnote markup, use the
+\printendnotes markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To start a new page, center a title (such as "Notes"), and dump the
+endnotes, enter:
+
+There is a well-marked division of
+labor.\autoendnote{Such as it is. Things could be
+different in the geological world, but they are not.}
+Details of organization have evolved by an
+optimization process. . . .
+\newpage
+\titlepage
+\cl{\bd Notes}
+\vs{\bl}
+\printendnotes
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Notes |
+| |
+| 1. Such as it is. Things could be different in the geological world, but |
+| they are not. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \printendnotes markup does not print the title "Note". It may be used
+more than once in a paper; for example, you may want to print all endnotes
+within a chapter at the end of the chapter rather than at the end of the
+entire paper. The \printendnotes markup prints all endnotes accumulated up
+to that point.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a49a225f25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| pageformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\pageformat{\pagelength{11in}
+ \pagewidth{8.5in}
+ \topmargin{1in}
+ \bottommargin{1in}
+ \leftmargin{1.2in}
+ \rightmargin{1in}
+ \bindingadjust{0pt}
+ }
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\pfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\pagelength, \pagewidth, \topmargin,
+\bottommargin, \leftmargin, \rightmargin, \bindingadjust,
+\galleywidthã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \pageformat markup specifies the page size and margins. The dimensions
+and margins for the pages of a document are set with page formatting markup.
+These submarkup are valid only within the \pageformat markup. Its seven
+submarkup are described below.
+
+ã|pagelengthã% specifies the length of the page to be used. The default
+page length, 11 inches is maximum for most printers.
+
+ã|pagewidthã% specifies the width of the page to be used. The default
+page width, 8.5 inches, is maximum for most printers. The \pagewidth
+and \rightmargin submarkup may optionally be replaced with the \galleywidth
+submarkup.
+
+ã|topmarginã% sets the distance from the top of the paper to the first line
+of text, excluding the top title(s). The default value is 1 inch.
+
+ã|bottommarginã% sets the distance from the bottom of the paper to the last
+line of the text, excluding the bottom title(s). The default value is 1
+inch.
+
+ã|leftmarginã% sets the distance from the left edge of the page to the left
+edge of the text. The default value is 1.2 inches.
+
+ã|rightmarginã% sets the distance from the right edge of the page to the
+right edge of the text. The default value is 1 inch. The \pagewidth
+and \rightmargin submarkup may optionally be replaced with the \galleywidth
+submarkup.
+
+ã|bindingadjustã% is used to offset left and right margins, which is useful
+for duplex printing (on both sides). The value given the \bindingadjust
+submarkup will increase the left margin on odd pages and decrease the left
+margin on even pages. The page text width is not shortened, only the
+margin. The default value is {0pt}.
+
+ã|galleywidthã% may be substituted for \pagewidth and \rightmargin to
+determine the width of the text. The \galleywidth has the same dimension
+as \hsize. You cannot use \galleywidth in the same fashion, however, as
+\hsize.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This custom source has 90 point (1 1/4inch) left and right margins.
+
+\pageformat{\leftmargin{90pt}
+ \rightmargin{90pt}}
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This custom source sets up a 9 inch by 6 inch page size. The margins have
+been decreased accordingly. A binding adjust value has been added.
+
+\pageformat{\pagelength{9in}
+ \topmargin{.5in}
+ \bottommargin{.5in}
+
+ \leftmargin{.6in}
+ \galleywidth{4.9in}
+ \bindingadjust{.2in}
+ }
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Do note include \pagewidth and \rightmargin in the \pageformat markup if you
+use the \galleywidth submarkup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pic.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pic.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c387a6fc35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pic.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| putincontents |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\picnã%
+
+Parameters: ã|text and markupã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+Major headings and the first two levels of subheadings are automatically
+placed in a table of contents (if one is called). Any heading, text, or
+markup can be put in the table of contents using the \putincontents markup
+(abbreviated \pic).
+ This markup has one parameter, but that parameter can be either markup
+to manipulate the table of contents itself or the text, usually a heading,
+to be put in the contents. Note that in the example the page number and dot
+leadering to separate it from the text were both included.
+ There are three levels of contents: the first (\pic1) puts text and/or
+markup into the primary table of contents; \pic2 puts text and/or markup
+into the list of figures; \pic3 puts text and/or markup into the list of
+tables.
+
+ Refer to the example on the next page.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To create an Abstract that conforms to the Washington State University
+graduate school's thesis requirements and print the abstract title in the
+table of contents, enter:
+
+\newpage
+\putincontents1{ABSTRACT\leader\pagenumber\par}
+\doublespace
+\vsk{6\bl}
+\centerlinesbegin
+\bd EFFECTIVENESS OF PRISM TRAINING
+ON THE IMPROVEMENT OF READING
+AT THE FIFTH GRADE LEVEL
+ABSTRACT
+\singlespace
+\vs{2\bl}
+\rm by Ray Elmer Brown, Ph.D.
+Washington State University, 1979
+\vs{1\bl}
+
+\centerlinesend
+\nin Chairman: Lloyd B. Johnson
+\vs{1\bl}
+The text of the abstract follows at this point . . .
+
+\pic2{LIST OF FIGURES\leader vi}
+\pic3{LIST OF TABLES\leader viii}
+\setpagenumber{0}
+\chapter{Introduction}
+
+(Note, single spacing will return to double spacing after the
+\centerlinesend markup, since it acts as a delimiter with
+\centerlinesbegin.)
+
+The abstract would print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| iv |
+| |
+| |
+| EFFECTIVENESS OF PRISM TRAINING |
+| ON THE IMPROVEMENT OF READING |
+| AT THE FIFTH GRADE LEVEL |
+| ABSTRACT |
+| |
+| |
+| by Ray Elmer Brown, Ph.D. |
+| Washington State University, 1979 |
+| |
+| Chairman: Lloyd B. Johnson |
+| |
+| The text of the abstract follows at this point . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The table of contents generated would contain:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS... . ... ... . ...... . ... ... . ...... . ... iii |
+| ABSTRACT. . . .... . . ...... . . .... . . ...... . . .... . . .....iv |
+| List of Figures ... . ... ... . ...... . ... ... . ...... . ... .vi |
+| List of Tables .... . .. .. .. . ...... . .. .. .. . ...... . .. . viii |
+| Introduction .. ... . ...... . ... ... . ...... . ... ... . ..... 1 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Notice in the sample source file illustrated on the previous page that the
+List of Figure's and List of Table's page numbers were manually put into the
+\putincontents markup. This is the only way to have these placed into the
+table of contents.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pin.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cb2aca4f66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pin.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| paragraphindent |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\pinã%
+
+Parameters: ã|indentã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+Throughout an entire document, paragraphs have 24 points indentation on the
+first line of each paragraph. This value may be changed by modifying the
+default with \paragraphindent. All following paragraphs will then exhibit
+the new indent.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+The first paragraph indent has been set to 14 points for comparison with the
+second paragraph which has a \paragraphindent of 24 points.
+
+\paragraphindent{14pt}
+{\it The Journal of Nonrepeating
+
+Results} is published by the Center for Unpleasant
+Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for
+articles are assigned to and held by the authors.
+\par
+\pin{24pt}
+The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm
+of Giga Geologicals, Inc.
+No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of
+experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect
+company policy.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| The Journal of Nonrepeating Results is published by the Center for |
+| Unpleasant Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for articles |
+| are assigned to and held by the authors. |
+| The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm of Giga |
+| Geologicals, Inc. No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of |
+| experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+If you are using \monospace, it is best to define the indent in tenths of an
+inch or in em's.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/plaintex.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/plaintex.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9115410ad1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/plaintex.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| plaintexmathon |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+This markup can be used to make the dollar sign ($) the valid math mode
+indicator as is used in PLAIN TEX instead of the TEXT1 math mode indicator,
+the at sign (@).
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\plaintexmathon
+$x+y=100$
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+
+Do not use this markup with \monospace.
+ If used, it should be specified at the top of your document. You will
+need to use the TEX \catcode markup to change back to using the at sign as
+the math mode indicator:
+
+\catcode'44=12
+
+For more on the \catcode markup, refer to The TEXbook.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pn.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9cba3d9d1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pn.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| pagenumber |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\pnã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \pagenumber markup merely places the current page number wherever the
+markup appears.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+In running heads, \pagenumber numbers the pages.
+
+\runningheadformat{\bothpages{\line{\rm
+ \lft{Southern Bays}\rt{page \pagenumber}}
+ \vs{2pt}
+ \hrule
+ \vs{1\bl}
+ }
+ }
+
+The running head would look like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Southern Bays 1 |
+| ........................................................................... |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you want no page numbers, then enter the following:
+
+\runningheadformat{\bothpage{}}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ppl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ppl.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8260c9d69e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ppl.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| poplevel |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\pplã%
+
+Parameters: ã|levelã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+This markup is used in counting lines for line numbering in the margin of a
+document. The level number is TEX's stacking level number. The default is
+pop level 7.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you must change to a different pop level, 9 for example, enter:
+
+\poplevel{9}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is
+ignored for all other printers.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pre.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pre.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7e44bb2dbd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pre.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| preface |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\preã%
+
+Parameters: ã|titleã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+Each preface starts a new page, centers the title in bold, and enters it in
+the table of contents (if one is printed). The preface is not numbered.
+Each heading markup can be used as often as necessary.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\today
+\preface{Acknowledgments}
+I am grateful for the assistance and financial support
+of the Grand Foundation for . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Acknowledgments |
+| |
+| I am grateful for the assistance and financial support of the Grand |
+| Foundation for . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+You can modify the default style for a preface with the \prefaceformat
+markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/preface.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/preface.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8fd4f9faf6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/preface.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|PREFACEã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\prefaceformat.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c0f4cde759
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| prefaceformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\prefaceformat{\titleformat{\dumpinsertseject
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd \prefacetitle}
+ \vs{1\bl}}
+ \incontents{yes}
+ }
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\prfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\titleformat, \incontentsã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \prefaceformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that control the
+appearance of the preface title. There are two submarkup:
+
+ã|titleformatã% controls the appearance of the part title banner. You
+may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \centerline within
+\titleformat as Nested Markup. You may also use:
+ ã|prefacetitle.ã% prints the most recent preface title.
+
+ã|incontentsã% places the preface title in contents (if one is printed).
+Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no."
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+In this example, the preface starts a new page, the title is centered in
+bold, and one line is skipped afterwards. No preface is put in contents.
+
+\prefaceformat{\titleformat{\newpage
+ \cl{\bd \prefacetitle}
+ \vs{1\bl}
+ }
+ \incontents{no}
+ }
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \prefaceformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are
+used.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prin.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..50b159f13f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prin.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| printingnumbers |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\prinã%
+
+Parameters: ã|statusã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+This markup is used to start the printing of line numbering in the margin of
+a document. Status is true or false.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To enable line numbers to be printed, enter:
+
+\printingnumbers{true}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is
+ignored for all other printers.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printend.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printend.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f149a6007e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printend.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \printendnotes (\pen) COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \printendnotes (\pen) command will space down the amount specified in the
+\endnoteformat{\skipbefore}} and print all accumulated endnotes. The
+\printendnotes (\pen) format is:
+
+ \printendnotes
+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printind.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printind.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3f796827af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printind.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| printindex |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|index numberã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \printindex markup sorts and prints the index entries generated with the
+\index markup. The \printindex markup would usually come at the end of a
+document before the table of contents. This markup has the format
+
+\printindexN
+
+where N is the index number: 1, 2 or 3. By default, the index is
+printed using the indent style of index in ten point Computer Modern. It
+is recommended that you print the index in two columns (\twocolumns). For
+a complete list of the defaults and how to modify them, refer to the
+\indexformat markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+The following illustrates how to place an index at the end of a document,
+after the last appendix, and before the table of contents. Assume the table
+of contents is to begin on page "iv".
+
+\appendix{Sample Data}
+
+\preface{Index}
+\twocolumns
+\printindex1
+\onecolumns
+\tableofcontents{-4}
+
+Using the \preface markup will start a new page with the title
+"Index" at the top of the page. Then \twocolumns will begin two column
+formatting (typical for indexes). Next \printindex1 will sort index "1" and
+print the sorted index according to the defaults set by the \indexformat
+markup. After printing the last of the index, \onecolumn will switch back
+to single column mode before printing the table of contents.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Sometimes multiple indexes are required. If you had used \index1 and
+\index2, then you would use \printindex1 and \printindex2 to print them out:
+
+\index1item in first index
+\index2item in second index
+\preface{Index One}
+\twocolumns
+\printindex1
+\onecolumns
+\preface{Index Two}
+\twocolumns
+\printindex2
+\onecolumns
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/psk.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/psk.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5a665edd5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/psk.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| paragraphskip |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\pskã%
+
+Parameters: ã|units of measureã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+This markup causes all following paragraphs to be separated by the new
+distance. The \paragraphskip is expressed using valid units of measurement
+in TEXT1. The default value is 0 points.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+The first two paragraphs used a paragraph skip of 10 points. The third one
+used a skip of 20 points.
+
+\paragraphskip{10pt}
+{\it The Journal of Nonrepeating
+Results} is published by the Center for Unpleasant
+
+Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for
+articles are assigned to and held by the authors.
+\par
+The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm
+of Giga Geologicals, Inc.
+
+\psk{20pt}
+No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of
+experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect
+company policy.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| The Journal of Nonrepeating Results is published by the Center for |
+| Unpleasant Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for articles |
+| are assigned to and held by the authors. |
+| |
+| The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm of Giga |
+| Geologicals, Inc. |
+| |
+| |
+| No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of experiments. |
+| The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The "plus3pt" after the setting of "0pt" means that up to 3 points
+additional space may be added before each paragraph, if this space is needed
+to fill out a page when using \normalbottom. If the \paragraphskip is set
+to "minus1pt", it implies that up to 1 point may be subtracted before each
+
+paragraphs if needed to fill out a page when using \normalbottom. Since the
+leading is usually only 2 points more than the size of the type, the "minus"
+value should not be more than 1 point.
+ If you are using \monospace, it is best to specify the units in blank
+lines. For example,
+
+\paragraphskip{1\bl}
+
+There are 6 \bl in an inch with \monospace.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/qquad.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/qquad.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..31d6772c21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/qquad.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| qquad |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \qquad markup leaves two quads of space. It is two em spaces in the
+current type size. It can be used in text, "as is," or math mode.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\tat{Surface Land Temperature (degrees C)\lbr
+Changes after Nuclear Exchanges}
+\vs{6pt}
+\settabs\+\qquad&number\qquad&number\qquad
+\+&number\qquad&number\qquad&10,000&\cr
+\+&1000&-22&8&7&13\cr
+
+\+&3000&9&6&8&10\cr
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Table 1 |
+| Surface Land Temperature (degrees C) |
+| Changes after Nuclear Exchanges |
+| |
+| |
+| 1000 -22 8 7 13 |
+| 3000 9 6 8 10 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+
+\qquad=\horizontalspace{2em}=\quad\quad. In \twelvept, \qquad approximately
+24 points; in \tenpt, \qquad approximately 20 points.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/quad.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/quad.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ffd0b320b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/quad.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| quad |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+A printer's quad of space used to be a blank square of type, 1 em high and
+1 em wide, equivalent in size to a capital "M." A TEXT1 quad is a unit of
+horizontal space. It is one em space in the current type size. The \quad
+markup can be used in text, "as is," and math mode.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Consider the input for this table:
+
+\tat{Surface Land Temperature (degrees C)\lbr
+Changes after Nuclear Exchanges}
+\vs{6pt}
+
+\settabs\+\quad&number\quad&number\quad
+\+&number\quad&number\quad&number&\cr
+\+&1000&-22&8&7&13\cr
+\+&3000&9&6&8&10\cr
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Table 1 |
+| Surface Land Temperature (degrees C) |
+| Changes after Nuclear Exchanges |
+| |
+| 1000 -22 8 7 13 |
+| 3000 9 6 8 10 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+\quad=\horizontalspace{1em}. In \twelvept, \quad approximately 12 points;
+in \tenpt, \quad approximately 10 points.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/raggedbo.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/raggedbo.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ab947ecb1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/raggedbo.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| raggedbottom |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+By default, TEXT1 tries to make the top and bottom of each page of text line
+up. If you are not concerned with having the bottom of each page line up,
+you can enter \raggedbottom. If you have specified \raggedbottom and you
+want to go back to the default, enter \normalbottom.
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/resume.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/resume.helpmode
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4ffcb945d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/resume.helpmode
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|RESUMEã%model is a general resume model. It is a template. You may modify
+it, but it is recommended you check with the Information Center first.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rff.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rff.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..22999b573a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rff.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| runningheadformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\runningfootformat{
+ \bothpages{\vs{1\bl}
+ \line{\twelvept\rm\lft{}
+ \ctr{}\rt{}}}
+ }
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\rffã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\bothpages, \evenpages, \oddpagesã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \runningfootformat markup provides running titles at the bottom of all
+pages except the title page. The default running bottom title for TEXT1 is
+blank.
+
+\bothpages is used to place the same running foot at the bottom of both the
+even and odd pages. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within
+it, you may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup
+\ctr, \lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule
+and \verticalspace.
+
+\evenpages is used to place the same running foot at the bottom of each
+even page. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within it,
+you may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup \ctr,
+\lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule and
+\verticalspace.
+
+\oddpages is used to place the same running foot at the bottom of each
+odd page. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within it, you
+may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup \ctr,
+\lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule and
+\verticalspace.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example prints the date and author's initials at the bottom of each
+page.
+
+\runningfootformat{
+ \bothpages{\vs{18pt}
+ \line{\rm\lft{\today}\ctr{}\rt{JNP}}
+ }
+ }
+
+which produces a running foot as illustrated on the next page.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| January 13, 1987 JNP |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example illustrates the use of odd and even page layout with two lines.
+The page number alternates sides so that it appears on the outside of the
+page. The title appears above the subtitle on even pages. The author's
+name appears above the journal name on odd pages.
+
+\runningfootformat{
+ \evenpages{\line{\lft{\pagenumber}
+ \rt{Sociogeology}}
+ \vs{2pt}}
+ \line{\rt{A New Science}}
+ \vs{\bl}}
+ \oddpages{\line{\lft{A. Chert}
+ \rt{\pagenumber}}
+
+ \vs{2pt}}
+ \line{\lft{SPP---UP}}
+ \vs{\bl}}
+ }
+
+which produces on even page numbers a running foot that looks like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 22 Sociogeology |
+| A New Science |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+and produces on odd page numbers a running foot that looks like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| A. Chert 11 |
+| SPP---UP |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+An empty \lft, \ctr, or \rt may be omitted as was done in the above example.
+ A construct such as,
+
+\rff{\bothpages{
+ \line{\lft{page \pn}\ctr{\today}
+ \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}}}
+
+will not print the date centered on the page:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| page 7 January 13, 1987 PNW Waterfalls |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+To accomplish this, you should print the left and right justified text with
+\line, then space backwards one line (\verticalspace{-\bl}), then center the
+date:
+
+\rff{\bothpages{\line{\lft{page \pn}
+
+ \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}}
+ \vs{-\bl}
+ \line{\ctr{\today}}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| page 8 January 13, 1987 PNW Waterfalls |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ The \runningfootformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if
+both are used.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rhf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rhf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..28f4ce697f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rhf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| runningheadformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\rhfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\bothpages, \evenpages, \oddpagesã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \runningheadformat markup provides running titles at the top of all
+pages except the title page. The default running top title for TEXT1 is a
+right justified page number.
+
+ã|bothpagesã% is used to place the same running head at the top of both the
+even and odd pages. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within
+it, you may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup
+\ctr, \lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule
+and \verticalspace.
+
+ã|evenpagesã% is used to place the same running head at the top of each
+even page. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within it,
+you may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup \ctr,
+\lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule and
+\verticalspace.
+
+ã|oddpagesã% is used to place the same running head at the top of each
+odd page. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within it, you
+may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup \ctr,
+\lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule and
+\verticalspace.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To customize running titles, you modify the \runningheadformat for the top
+titles and the \runningfootformat for bottom titles. In this example,
+"Sociogeology" and a page number are placed at the top of every page.
+
+\runningheadformat{\bothpages{\it
+ \line{\lft{Sociogeology}\ctr{}\rt{\pn}}
+ \vs{2pt}
+ \hrule
+ \verticalspace{18pt}
+ }
+}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Sociogeology 1 |
+| ........................................................................... |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example alternates the author's name and page number at the top of even
+and odd pages. It complements the last example on the previous page.
+
+\rhf{\evenpages{\vs{\bl}
+ \line{\lft{Chert}}}
+ \oddpages{\vs{\bl}
+ \line{\rt{\pagenumber}}}
+ }
+
+Even pages will look like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Chert |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Odd pages will look like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 4 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+An empty \lft, \ctr, or \rt may be omitted as was done in the above example.
+ A construct such as,
+
+\rhf{\bothpages{
+ \line{\lft{page \pn}\ctr{\today}
+ \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}}}
+
+will not print the date centered on the page:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| page 6 February 5, 1987 PNW Waterfalls |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+To accomplish this, you should print the left and right justified text with
+\line, then space backwards one line (\verticalspace{-\bl}), then center the
+date:
+
+\rhf{\bothpages{\line{\lft{page \pn}
+
+ \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}}
+ \vs{-\bl}
+ \line{\ctr{\today}}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| page 7 February 5, 1987 PNW Waterfalls |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ The \runningheadformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if
+both are used.
+ If you want no page numbers, then enter the following:
+
+\runningheadformat{\bothpages{}}
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rin.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bed41f21f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rin.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| rightindent |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\rinã%
+
+Parameters: ã|units of measurementã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \rightindent markup adds (or subtracts) the amount from the current
+right margin (default is zero). The indentation remains until another
+\rightindent overrides it. This markup causes a break in text.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+Humans also require trace amounts of manganese,
+zinc, selenium, and copper, appearing in suitable
+proportions.
+\vs{50pt}
+\lin{1in}
+
+\rightindent{1.5in}
+{\bd Figure 2}.
+Physiognomic similarities between the earth and
+human beings.
+\rightindent{-1.5in}
+\lin{0in}
+\vs{10pt}
+Most elemental abundances are the same in the
+lithosphere and the anthrosphere.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Humans also require trace amounts of manganese, zinc, selenium, and |
+| copper, appearing in suitable proportions. |
+| |
+| Figure 2. Physiognomic similarities between |
+| the earth and human beings. |
+| |
+| Most elemental abundances are the same in the lithosphere and the |
+| anthrosphere. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+The previous example could have used grouping as illustrated below and the
+same output would have been generated. If you do grouping, be sure there is
+a \paragraph markup before the closing right curly brace of the group.
+
+Humans also require trace amounts of manganese,
+zinc, selenium, and copper, appearing in suitable
+proportions.
+\vs{50pt}
+{\lin{1in}
+\rightindent{1.5in}
+{\bd Figure 2}.
+Physiognomic similarities between the earth and
+human beings.
+\par
+}
+\vs{10pt}
+Most elemental abundances are the same in the
+lithosphere and the anthrosphere.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Humans also require trace amounts of manganese, zinc, selenium, and |
+| copper, appearing in suitable proportions. |
+| |
+| Figure 2. Physiognomic similarities between |
+| the earth and human beings. |
+| |
+| Most elemental abundances are the same in the lithosphere and the |
+| anthrosphere. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rl.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..92e51079b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rl.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| rightline |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\rlã%
+
+Parameters: ã|text to be right justifiedã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \rightline markup right justifies individual lines. This markup ends
+the previous paragraph. The only parameter for this markup is text.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+yet some of the reviews of "Sociogeology" have
+been mixed, especially from academics.
+\rightline{This theory is 'on the rocks.'}
+\rl{\it Clay Gneiss}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| yet some of the reviews of "Sociogeology" have been mixed, especially from |
+| academics. |
+| This theory is 'on the rocks.' |
+| Clay Gneiss |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rlb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rlb.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4d714ff65a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rlb.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| rightlinesbegin |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\rlbã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \rightlinesbegin markup begins right justifying all following lines.
+Vertical spacing and font changes are the only markup permitted after it.
+There are no parameters or markup options. End a \rightlinesbegin with a
+matching \rightlinesend.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\rightlinesbegin
+This theory is 'on the rocks.'
+{\it Clay Gneiss}
+\rightlinesend
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| This theory is 'on the rocks.' |
+| Clay Gneiss |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Each \rightlinesbegin must be followed by a matching \rightlinesend.
+ You cannot use \rightlinesbegin within any of the following markup:
+\appendim, \autofootnote, \bibliography, \centerline, \chapter, \drawbox,
+\figure, \footnote, \item, \label, \marginnote, \paragraphbox, \part,
+\preface, \rightline, \runningheadformat, \runningfootformat, \subheada,
+\subheadb, \subheadc, \subheadd, or \tabletitle.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rle.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rle.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4c4ec76858
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rle.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| rightlinesend |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\rleã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \rightlinesend markup ends lines that are being right justified with
+\rightlinesbegin. This markup causes a paragraph break.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\rightlinesbegin
+This theory is 'on the rocks.'
+{\it Clay Gneiss}
+\rightlinesend
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| This theory is 'on the rocks.' |
+| Clay Gneiss |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Each \rightlinesbegin must be followed by a matching \rightlinesend.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rm.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rm.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..de8ed390f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rm.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| roman |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\rmã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+Roman is a medium-weight type good for reading. It is the default face for
+TEXT1. It is usually specified as the default font at the beginning of a
+paper, so that it will be in effect for most of the paper. Roman can also
+be used to terminate the use of a special typeface, such as italic or bold.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\twelvept
+\italic now! \roman It is important to realize
+\it the facts!
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| now! It is important to realize the facts! |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example is the same as the one above, except that grouping was used to
+change from the roman font back to italics.
+
+\tenpt
+\italic now! {\roman It is important to realize}
+the facts!
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| now! It is important to realize the facts! |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rr.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..af80dc37cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rr.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| rightragged |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\rrã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \rightragged markup turns off right justification. If you only want
+to right justify a certain section of the document, then you would use a
+combination of the \justify and \rightragged markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\rightragged
+The comparison may seem facile, but from deliberate
+oversimplification comes complex obfuscation and
+general theoretification.
+Behavioral research will lead in this direction, as
+
+the general theory of Sociogeology predicts the . . .
+\justify
+Humans exhibit metamorphic behavior over time or at high
+temperatures, fever, for instance.
+Metamorphic crystallization involves low . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| The comparison may seem facile, but from deliberate oversimplification |
+| comes complex obfuscation and general theoretification. Behavioral |
+| research will lead in this direction, as the general theory of |
+| Sociogeology predicts the . . . |
+| Humans exhibit metamorphic behavior over time or at high temperatures, |
+| fever, for instance. Metamorphic crystallization involves low . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+
+The default values for space skips is listed below. When you are using
+\monospace you get the values in the right column.
+
+ Composing Printers Typewriter Printers
+ \rightskip plus 1fil plus 10em
+ \spaceskip .35em 1em
+ \xspaceskip .55em 1em
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rule.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rule.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..71a72ad0a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rule.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| rule |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \rule markup skips a blank line and draws a horizontal line (rule).
+Rules are used to separate material, such as tables or sections. No extra
+vertical space is skipped after the rule, so you may need to add some with
+\vs.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+\tabletitle{Elements of the Spheres}
+\rule
+\vs{6pt}
+\tabskip 3em plus 3em minus 1em
+\halign{\lft{#}&&\rt{#}\hs{20pt}\cr
+
+Element&\omit\ctr{Anthrosphere}&\omit\ctr{Lithosphere}\cr
+Oxygen&62.1\phantom{0}&60.6\phantom{0}\cr
+Hydrogen&1.1\phantom{0}&0.1\phantom{0}\cr
+Aluminum&0.22&11.54\cr}
+\rule
+\vs{6pt}
+\nin Most elemental abundances are the same in the . . .
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| Table 1 |
+| Elements of the Spheres |
+| |
+| ........................................................................... |
+| |
+| Element Anthrosphere Lithosphere |
+| Oxygen 62.1 60.6 |
+| Hydrogen 1.1 0.1 |
+| Aluminum 0.22 11.54 |
+| ........................................................................... |
+| Most elemental abundances are the same in the . . . |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+If you want a rule of a different height, depth, or width than illustrated
+with \rule and if you are not using \monospace, then use \hrule.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runfoot.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runfoot.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..259d368dcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runfoot.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|RUNFOOTã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\runningfootformat which is carried at the bottom of every page
+except the title page.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runhead.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runhead.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0dd2248ba3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runhead.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|RUNHEADã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\runningheadformat which is carried at the top of every page
+except the title page.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/san.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/san.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..05b9299a2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/san.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| setappendixnumber |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\sanã%
+
+Parameters: ã|previous appendix numberã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The appendix number will be automatically incremented by one for each
+use of \appendix. The appendix number can be reset by inserting the
+\setappendixnumber markup before the next occurrence of \appendix.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+By default, the first appendix is number 1. If you want to start with
+appendix 5, you would enter:
+
+\setappendixnumber{4}
+\appendix{Title of the fifth appendix}
+
+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The number specified in the \setappendixnumber parameter is the previous
+appendix number, not the next appendix number.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sau.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sau.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..24ce71ea8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sau.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| sameauthor |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\sauã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \sameauthor markup allows you to substitute a standard rule for an
+author's name for multiple references in a bibliography. The default rule
+is 3 em spaces wide; the default width may be changed in \bibliographyformat
+markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\bibliography{References Cited}
+\frenchspacing
+\bibentry
+Roszak, T. 1972. {\it Where the Wasteland Ends}.
+New York: Harper \& Row.
+
+\bie
+Weldon, S. 1971. {\it Waging Peace}.
+Wilmington: M. \&\ R. Wolfe, Limited.
+\bie
+\sameauthor 1983. {\it The Metaindustry: War and
+Economic Development}.
+Los Angeles: Thompson Books.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| References Cited |
+| |
+| Roszak, T. 1972. Where the Wasteland Ends. New York: Harper & Row. |
+| |
+| Weldon, S. 1971. Waging Peace. Wilmington: M. & R. Wolfe, Limited. |
+| |
+| ....1983. The Metaindustry: War and Economic Development. Los Angeles: |
+| Thompson Books. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/scn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/scn.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..08b572cb2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/scn.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| setchapternumber |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\scnã%
+
+Parameters: ã|previous chapter numberã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The chapter number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of
+\chapter. The chapter number can be reset by inserting the \setchapternum-
+ber markup before the next occurrence of \chapter.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+By default, the first chapter is number 1. If you want to start with
+chapter 5, you would enter:
+
+\setchapternumber{4}
+\chapter{Title of the fifth chapter}
+
+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The number specified in the \setchapternumber parameter is the previous
+chapter number, not the next chapter number.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/senn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/senn.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b032b8a8d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/senn.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| setendnotenumber |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\sennã%
+
+Parameters: ã|previous endnote numberã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The endnote number will be automatically incremented by one for each
+use of \autoendnote. The endnote number can be reset by adding the
+\setendnotenumber markup before the next occurrence of an \autoendnote.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+By default, endnote numbers are reset in parts. If you also want them reset
+in chapters, you could modify the \chapterformat by adding \setendnotenumber
+to the \titleformat:
+
+\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber}
+
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle}
+ \vs{1\bl}
+ \setendnotenumber{0}
+ \setsubheadanumber{0}
+ \setsubheadbnumber{0}
+ \setsubheadcnumber{0}
+ \setsubheaddnumber{0}}
+ \incontents{yes}}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The number specified in the \setendnotenumber parameter is the previous
+endnote number, not the next endnote number. If you want the next
+\autoendnote to be endnote 90, then specify
+
+\setendnotenumber{89}
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/settabs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/settabs.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..53b535a5e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/settabs.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| settabs |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|number of columnsã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The body of the table is created with the \settabs n \columns markup, which
+establishes a number (n) of equal-size tabular columns (\columns).
+ Each new column after the first is indicated with the TEXT1 tab
+character (&). Each row is started with the \+ markup and ended with the
+\cr markup (which is an abbreviation for carriage return on typewriters).
+ The ampersand (&) is like the TAB key on many typewriters; it tells
+TEXT1 to advance to the next tab position, where there is a tab at the right
+edge of each column. But & is not exactly like a mechanical typewriter
+TAB, because it first backs up to the beginning of the current column
+before advancing to the next. In this way you can always tell what column
+you are tabbing to, by counting the number of &s; that is handy, because
+
+variable-width type otherwise makes it difficult to know whether you have
+passed a tab position.
+ The ampersands are different from tabs in another way, too: TEXT1
+ignores spaces after &, hence you can conveniently finish a column by typing
+& at the end of a line in your input file, without worrying that an extra
+blank space will be introduced there. Incidentally, TEXT1 also ignores
+spaces after \+, so that the first column is treated like the others.
+ You can say \cr before you have specified a complete set of columns, if
+the remaining columns are blank. The last \cr ends the settabs. No other
+ending is necessary; normal text may follow.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+can be seen, the pool of common words is prodigious.
+\par
+\tabletitle{Etymological Clues}
+\settabs 3 \columns
+\+\it Term&\it Geological&\it Social Reference\cr
+\+boss&small rock&supervisor\cr
+\+domehead&pushing through&intellectual\cr
+\+fossil&turned to stone&age\cr
+\+creep&move slowly&person\cr
+\+streak&move quickly&naked\cr
+\+ejecta&very quickly&mating\cr
+\+sublimate&change to gas&dream\cr
+\+trench&sediments&mouth\cr
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| can be seen, the pool of common words is prodigious. |
+| |
+| Table 1 |
+| Etymological Clues |
+| |
+| Term Geological Social Reference |
+| boss small rock supervisor |
+| domehead pushing through intellectual |
+| fossil turned to stone age |
+| creep move slowly person |
+| streak move quickly naked |
+| ejecta very quickly mating |
+| sublimate change to gas dream |
+| trench sediments mouth |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+You may not want all of the columns to be the same size, so there is another
+way to set them, by typing "\+sample line\cr" immediately after \settabs.
+In this case tabs are placed at the positions of the &s in the sample line,
+but the sample line itself does not appear in the output. Look through
+the table and determine the biggest entry in each column; the sample line
+is then constructed by typing the widest entry in the first column, then
+the widest in each subsequent column, omitting the last column. Be sure to
+include some extra space (\horizontalspace{}) between columns in the sample
+line, so that the columns won't touch each other.
+
+can be seen, the pool of common words is prodigious.
+\par
+\tabletitle{Etymological Clues}
+\settabs\+\hs{4pt}&domeheads\hs{4pt}
+ &material pushing through
+ \hs{10pt}&Intellectual\cr
+\+&\it Term&\it Geological&\it Social Reference\cr
+\+&trench&subducted sediments&mouth\cr
+
+\+&dike&material holding back&female\cr
+\+&domehead&material pushing through&intellectual\cr
+\+&fossil&life turned to stone&age\cr
+\+&cleavage&the tendency to split&bosom\cr
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| can be seen, the pool of common words is prodigious. |
+| |
+| Table 2 |
+| Etymological Clues |
+| |
+| Term Geological Social Reference |
+| trench subducted sediments mouth |
+| dike material holding back female |
+| domehead material pushing through intellectual |
+| fossil life turned to stone age |
+| cleavage the tendency to split bosom |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you want to put something right justified (flush right) in its column,
+just type \rt{text} where text is the text to be right justified; Be sure
+to type & after it, so that TEX will be sure to move the information all
+the way until it touches the next tab. Similarly, if you want to center
+something in its column, type \ctr{text} where text is the text to be
+centered. Notice also the use of \phantom in decimal alignment.
+
+ \centerline{\bd Table 1}
+ \centerline{Etymological Clues}
+ \settabs \+\hs{20pts}&Aluminum\quad&Anthrosphere&
+ \hs{20pt}&Lithosphere\quad\cr
+ \+&\lft{Element}&\rt{Anthrosphere}&
+ &\rt{Lithosphere}&\cr
+ \+&Sodium&\rt{0.001\phantom{0}}&&\rt{0.4\phantom{000}}\cr
+ \+&Silicon&\rt{.0001}&&\rt{20.2\phantom{000}}\cr
+ \+&Aluminum&\rt{0.22\phantom{00}}&&
+ \rt{11.54\phantom{00}}\cr
+ \+&Carbon&\rt{19.1001}&&\rt{0.0202}\cr
+
+ \+&Nitrogen&\rt{3.2205}&&\rt{.0208}\cr
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Table 1 |
+| Etymological Clues |
+| Element Anthrosphere Lithosphere |
+| Sodium 0.001 0.4 |
+| Silicon .0001 20.2 |
+| Aluminum 0.22 11.54 |
+| Carbon 19.1001 0.0202 |
+| Nitrogen 3.2205 .0208 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+
+Tab positions are remembered, until they are reset with another \settabs,
+regardless of text and other markup following.
+ The operation of tabs addresses one line at a time; this allows multiple
+page tables.
+ You cannot use \figure, \drawbox or \paragraphbox around a \settabs.
+ Refer to The TEXbook for more on \phantom.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfn.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0c3ef81afc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfn.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| setfigurenumber |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\sfnã%
+
+Parameters: ã|previous figure numberã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The figure number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of
+\figure. The figure number can be reset by adding the \setfigurenumber
+markup before the next occurrence of \figure.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+By default, figure numbers are reset in parts. If you also want them reset
+in chapters, you could modify the \chapterformat by adding \setfigurenumber
+to the \titleformat:
+
+\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber}
+
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle}
+ \vs{1\bl}
+ \setfigurenumber{0}
+ \setsubheadanumber{0}
+ \setsubheadbnumber{0}
+ \setsubheadcnumber{0}
+ \setsubheaddnumber{0}}
+ \incontents{yes}}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The number specified in the \setfigurenumber parameter is the previous
+figure number, not the next figure number. If you want the next \figure to
+be Figure 90, then specify
+
+\setfigurenumber{89}
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfnn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfnn.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..369f764e65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfnn.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| setfootnotenumber |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\sfnnã%
+
+Parameters: ã|previous footnote numberã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The footnote number will be automatically incremented by one for each
+use of \autofootnote. The footnote number can be reset by adding the
+\setfootnotenumber markup before the next occurrence of an autofootnote.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+By default, footnote numbers are reset in parts. If you also want
+them reset in chapters, you could modify the \chapterformat by adding
+\setfootnotenumber to the \titleformat:
+
+\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber}
+
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle}
+ \vs{1\bl}
+ \setfootnotenumber{0}
+ \setsubheadanumber{0}
+ \setsubheadbnumber{0}
+ \setsubheadcnumber{0}
+ \setsubheaddnumber{0}}
+ \incontents{yes}}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The number specified in the \setfootnotenumber parameter is the previous
+footnote number, not the next footnote number. If you want the next
+\autofootnote to be footnote 90, then specify
+
+\setfootnotenumber{89}
+
+ The \setfootnotenumber markup has no effect on the \footnote markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfs.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..241c41268b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfs.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| selectfontset |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\selectfontset{cm12}{twelvept}{14pt}
+\selectfontset{cm10}{tenpt}{12pt}
+\twelvept
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\sfsã%
+
+Parameters: ã|catalog name, user's reference, leadingã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+For a typical document, you will need both a font set and a math set.
+The default font set selections consist of two sets for composing printers:
+\twelvept for the 12 point size Computer Modern serif typestyle; and \tenpt
+for the 10 point Computer Modern serif typestyle. Typically, the \select-
+fontset markup is placed in the front of your document. The format of this
+markup is
+
+\selectfontset{catalog name}{user's reference name}{leading between lines}
+
+where catalog name is the system name for that font set. (Complete lists
+of the catalog names can be found by going to the TEXT1 help menu, or by
+looking in the Font Catalogs.) The user's reference is a name of your own
+devising. This name, when prefaced with a backslash will give you access to
+that font set. The leading is the interlineskip specification.
+ Users of typewriter printers use different \selectfontset markup, which
+offers "standard", "underscore" (for italic), and "bold" monospaced faces.
+These are the only fonts available to such printers.
+ Each font set includes the following nine faces, each of which is called
+by adding a backslash in front of the name, or using the abbreviation:
+\roman (\rm), \bold (\bd), \italic (\it), \typewriter (\tt), \caps (\cc),
+\mathitalic (\mi), \symbol (\sy), \extension (\ex), and \bolditalic (\bi).
+Not all font sets have all nine faces available. If a particular face is
+not available, a warning message will be printed.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+After entering the \selectfontset,
+
+\selectfontset{cm11}{eleven}{default}
+\eleven
+
+each time \eleven is specified, you would be using the Computer Modern font
+set at a 11 point size (cm11). The third parameter ("default") indicates
+that TEXT1 will use the default value for \interlineskip, in this case 13
+points. Then, whenever you switch to bold (\bd) you would get Computer
+Modern bold at a 11 point size. If you were to specify \it you would get
+Computer Modern italic at 11 points.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Consider this example for switching from 9 point to a 8 point size.
+The \eightpoint is set with \interlineskip{9pt} instead of the default
+\interlineskip{10pt}, leaving less space between lines.
+
+\selectfontset{cm9}{ninepoint}{default}
+\selectfontset{cm8}{eightpoint}{9pt}
+\eightpoint
+
+\centerline{\ninepoint\bd Sociogeology}
+\vs{12pt}
+\centerline{\it by Achilles Chert}
+\vs{12pt}
+"Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus,
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Sociogeology |
+| |
+| by Achilles Chert |
+| |
+| "Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Again, not all font sets have all nine faces available. If a particular
+face is not available, a warning message will be printed.
+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sha.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sha.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4c5bb98f47
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sha.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| subheada |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\shaã%
+
+Parameters: ã|titleã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \subheada markup creates a first level subheading, which skips two
+baselines, prints the title in bold type, then skips one more baseline. It
+does not begin a new page. Its title is placed in the table of contents
+automatically.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+more realistic.
+\subheada{Nationalism and War}
+Nationalism is directly related to war.
+Lord Acton observed that . . .
+
+which prints:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| more realistic. |
+| |
+| |
+| Nationalism and War |
+| |
+| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that |
+| . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Use \subheadaformat to change any of the above mentioned defaults.
+ TEXT1 will encourage page breaking before a \subheada. It discourages
+page breaking between the \subheada and the first line of the following
+paragraph.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shaf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shaf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3cf2d51cd9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shaf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| subheadaformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\subheadaformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\removelastskip
+ \goodbreak\vs{2\bl}
+ \twelvept
+ \bd\nin\subheadatitle
+ \par\nobreak
+ \vs{1\bl}\nobreak
+ \setsubheadbnumber{0}
+ \setsubheadcnumber{0}
+ \setsubheaddnumber{0}}
+ \incontents{yes}
+ }
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\shafã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \subheadaformat markup lets you change the appearance of the subheading
+title. There are three submarkup that control how the \subheada is to
+appear.
+
+ã|\numberingstyleã% by default is 1 which will print the subhead number in
+Arabic numbers. Other possibilities are "A" and "I". By default, subhead
+numbers are not printed, even though the \subheadanumber is incremented.
+
+ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% is used to describe how the subhead title is
+to be printed. You may use markup such as \newpage, \removelastskip,
+\goodbreak, \nobreak, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \titleformat
+as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside of
+\subheadaformat:
+
+ * \subheadanumberprints the most recent subheada number.
+
+ * \subheadatitleprints the most recent subheada title.
+
+ã|\incontentsã% places the subheada title by default in the contents (if one is
+printed). Printing in the table of contents can be suppressed by changing
+to "no":
+
+\shaf{\incontents{no}}
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Some applications require the subheads to be numbered. For \subheada to
+include a number like "pp.cc-aa" where "pp" is the part number, "cc" is
+the chapter number, and "aa" is the subheada number, you would modify the
+\subheadaformat:
+
+\subheadaformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\removelastskip\goodbreak\vs{2\bl}
+ \bd\partnumber.\chapternumber-\subheadanumber
+ \quad\subheadatitle\par
+ \nobreak\vs{1\bl}\nobreak}
+ \incontents{yes}
+}
+
+more realistic.
+\par
+\subheada{Nationalism and War}
+Nationalism is directly related to war.
+Lord Acton observed that . . .
+
+The second subheada in the third chapter of the first part would print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| more realistic. |
+| |
+| |
+| 1.3-2 Nationalism and War |
+| |
+| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that |
+| . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \subheadaformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both
+are used.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shb.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6c4e302561
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shb.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| subheadb |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\shbã%
+
+Parameters: ã|titleã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \subheadb markup creates a second level subheading, which skips two
+baselines, prints the title in italics, then skips one more baseline. It
+does not begin a new page. Its title is placed in the table of contents
+automatically.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+more realistic.
+\par
+\subheadb{Nationalism and War}
+Nationalism is directly related to war.
+Lord Acton observed that . . .
+
+which prints:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| more realistic. |
+| |
+| |
+| Nationalism and War |
+| |
+| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that |
+| . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Use \subheadbformat to change any of the above mentioned defaults.
+ TEXT1 will encourage page breaking before a \subheadb. It discourages
+page breaking between the \subheadb and the first line of the following
+paragraph.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shbf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shbf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7c0e27505b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shbf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| subheadbformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\subheadbformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\removelastskip
+ \goodbreak\vs{2\bl}
+ \twelvept
+ \it\nin\subheadbtitle
+ \par\nobreak
+ \vs{1\bl}\nobreak
+ \setsubheadcnumber{0}
+ \setsubheaddnumber{0}}
+ \incontents{yes}
+ }
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\shbfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \subheadbformat markup lets you change the appearance of the subheading
+title. There are three submarkup that control how the \subheadb is to
+appear.
+
+ã|\numberingstyleã% by default is 1 which will print the subhead number in
+Arabic numbers. Other possibilities are "A" and "I". By default, subhead
+numbers are not printed, even though the \subheadbnumber is incremented.
+
+ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã is used to describe how the subhead title is
+to be printed. You may use markup such as \newpage, \removelastskip,
+\goodbreak, \nobreak, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \titleformat
+as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside of
+\subheadbformat:
+
+ * \subheadbnumberprints the most recent subheadb number.
+
+ * \subheadbtitleprints the most recent subheadb title.
+
+ã|\incontentsã% places the subheadb title by default in the contents (if one is
+printed). Printing in the table of contents can be suppressed by changing
+to "no":
+
+\shbf{\incontents{no}}
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Some applications require the subheads to be numbered. If you wanted
+\subheadb to include a number like "pp.cc.aa.bb" where "pp" is the part
+number, "cc" is the chapter number, "aa" is the subheada number, and "bb" is
+the subheadb number, you would modify the \subheadbformat:
+
+ \subheadbformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\removelastskip\goodbreak\vs{2\bl}
+ \italic
+ \partnumber.\chapternumber.\subheadanumber.\subheadbnumber
+ \quad\subheadbtitle\par
+ \nobreak\vs{1\bl}\nobreak}
+ \incontents{yes}
+ }
+
+ more realistic.
+ \subheadb{Nationalism and War}
+ Nationalism is directly related to war.
+
+ Lord Acton observed that . . .
+
+The first subheadb in the second subheada of the third chapter of the first
+part would print as:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| more realistic. |
+| |
+| |
+| 1.3.2.1 Nationalism and War |
+| |
+| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that |
+| . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \subheadbformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both
+are used.
+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shc.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..19133b8456
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shc.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| subheadc |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\shcã%
+
+Parameters: ã|titleã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \subheadc markup creates a third level subheading, which skips two
+baselines, prints the title in roman type, then skips one more baseline. It
+does not begin a new page. Its title is not placed in the table of contents
+automatically.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+more realistic.
+\subheadc{Nationalism and War}
+Nationalism is directly related to war.
+Lord Acton observed that . . .
+
+which prints:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| more realistic. |
+| |
+| |
+| Nationalism and War |
+| |
+| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that |
+| . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Use \subheadcformat to change any of the above mentioned defaults.
+ TEXT1 will encourage page breaking before a \subheadc. It discourages
+page breaking between the \subheadc and the first line of the following
+paragraph.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shcf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shcf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bb7cbe0822
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shcf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| subheadcformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\subheadcformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\removelastskip
+ \goodbreak\vs{2\bl}
+ \twelvept
+ \rm\nin\subheadctitle
+ \par\nobreak
+ \vs{1\bl}\nobreak
+ \setsubheaddnumber{0}}
+ \incontents{no}
+ }
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\shcfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \subheadcformat markup lets you change the appearance of the subheading
+title. There are three submarkup that control how the \subheadc is to
+appear.
+
+ã|\numberingstyleã% by default is 1 which will print the subhead number in
+Arabic numbers. Other possibilities are "A" and "I". By default, subhead
+numbers are not printed, even though the \subheadcnumber is incremented.
+
+ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% is used to describe how the \subheadc title
+is to be printed. You may use markup such as \newpage, \removelastskip,
+\goodbreak, \nobreak, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \titleformat
+as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside of
+\subheadcformat:
+
+ * \subheadcnumberprints the most recent subheadc number.
+
+ * \subheadctitleprints the most recent subheadc title.
+
+ã|\incontentsã% places the subheadc title in the contents (if one is printed).
+By default, the title is not placed in the contents. Printing in the table
+of contents can be included by changing to "yes":
+
+\shcf{\incontents{yes}}
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Some applications require the subheads to be numbered. If you wanted
+\subheadc to include a number like "Section cc:" where "cc" is a bold
+subheadc number, you could modify the \subheadcformat:
+
+\subheadcformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\removelastskip\goodbreak\vs{2\bl}
+ \nin\bd Section \subheadcnumber:
+ \quad\subheadctitle\par
+ \nobreak\vs{1\bl}\nobreak}
+ \incontents{no}
+}
+
+more realistic.
+\subheadc{Nationalism and War}
+Nationalism is directly related to war.
+Lord Acton observed that . . .
+
+The third subheadc would print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| more realistic. |
+| |
+| |
+| Section 3: Nationalism and War |
+| |
+| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that |
+| . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \subheadcformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both
+are used.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shd.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shd.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fa6cb2feaa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shd.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| subheadd |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\shdã%
+
+Parameters: ã|titleã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \subheadd markup creates a fourth level subheading, which skips to a new
+paragraph, prints the title in italics followed by a period, then continues
+the paragraph. It does not begin a new page. Its title is not placed in
+the table of contents automatically.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+more realistic.
+\subheadd{Nationalism and War}
+Nationalism is directly related to war.
+Lord Acton observed that . . .
+
+which prints:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| more realistic. |
+| Nationalism and War. Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord |
+| Acton observed that . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Use \subheaddformat to change any of the above mentioned defaults.
+ TEXT1 will encourage page breaking before a \subheadd.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shdf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shdf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..39b552a430
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shdf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| subheaddformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\subheaddformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\goodbreak
+ {\twelvept
+ \it\subheaddtitle.}
+ \incontents{no}
+ }
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\shdfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \subheaddformat markup lets you change the appearance of the subheading
+title. There are three submarkup that control how the \subheadd is to
+appear.
+
+ã|\numberingstyleã% by default is 1 which will print the subhead number in
+Arabic numbers. Other possibilities are "A" and "I". By default, subhead
+numbers are not printed, even though the \subheaddnumber is incremented.
+
+ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% is used to describe how the subhead title is
+to be printed. You may use markup such as \newpage, \removelastskip,
+\goodbreak, \nobreak, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \titleformat
+as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside of
+\subheaddformat:
+
+ * \subheaddnumberprints the most recent subheadd number.
+
+ * \subheaddtitleprints the most recent subheadd title.
+
+ã|\incontentsã% places the subheadd title in the contents (if one is printed).
+By default, the title is not placed in the contents. Printing in the table
+of contents can be included by changing to "yes":
+
+\shdf{\incontents{yes}}
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted a subhead to place the title in a lable, you would modify the
+\subheaddformat:
+
+\subheaddformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\removelastskip\goodbreak\vs{2\bl}
+ \label{\subheaddtitle}
+ }
+ \incontents{no}
+}
+
+more realistic.
+\subheadd{Nationalism and War}
+Nationalism is directly related to war.
+Lord Acton observed that the increase in nationalism
+significantly increases a country's ability to
+protect itself . . .
+
+The fourth subheadd would print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| more realistic. |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| Nationalism |
+| and War thatonthesmincreaseeinlynationalism significantlyctincreasesea |
+| country's ability to protect itself . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \subheaddformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both
+are used.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sms.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sms.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..63213a1656
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sms.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| selectmathset |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\selectmathset{cm97m}{mathdefault}
+\mathdefault
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\smsã%
+
+Parameters: ã|catalog name, user's referenceã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \selectmathset markup loads type for use by math mode. Superscripted
+footnotes, and mathematical equations, require the TEXT1 math mode. For
+composing printers, the default for the primary (script) math set that is
+used to set super or subscripts is a 9 point Computer Modern, the secondary
+(script-script) math set which is used to set super-super or sub-subscripts
+is 7 point Computer Modern. TEXT1 typewriter printers do not support math
+mode. The format of this markup is
+
+\selectmathset{catalog name}{user's reference name}
+
+where catalog name is the system name for that math set. (Complete lists
+of the catalog names can be found by going to the TEXT1 help menu, or by
+looking in the Font Catalogs.) The design of this name is such that the
+first digit(s) is the primary (script) size, the second digit(s) is the
+secondary (script-script) size. The user's reference is a name of your own
+devising. This name, when prefaced with a backslash will give you access to
+that math set.
+ Typically, the \selectmathset markup is placed in the front of your
+document with your \selectfontset markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This math mode example uses a primary 14 point math font, instead of the
+default, and a secondary math font of 12 point.
+
+\selectmathset{cm1412m}{bigmath}
+\selectfontset{cm18}{bigfont}{default}
+\bigfont
+\bigmath
+Human intelligence became possible when
+@@C_{14}\to C_{1.4 \bullet 10^6}@@
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Typically, the \selectmathset markup is placed in the front of your document
+with your \selectfontset markup.
+ TEXT1 typewriter printers do not support math mode.
+ Only the super and subscripts are affected by the math mode fonts
+selected with the \selectmathset markup.
+ See The TEXbook for more on math mode.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/special.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/special.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..48597c9326
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/special.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Special Characters |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+In TeX there are 10 keyboard characters which have special meaning. They are:
+
+ \ (backslash) } (right curly brace) { (left curly brace)
+ @ (at sign) # (pound sign) _ (underscore)
+ & (ampersand) % (percent sign) ~ (tilde) | (vertical bar)
+
+If you need any of these characters as part of your text you must precede all
+but the tilde and vertical bar with a \ (backslash) or TeX will interpret them
+as a TeX command. To print a tilde you must enter \tilde and for a vertical bar
+enter \vbar.
+
+For example, the following input:
+
+ Mom sent Tommy to the store and told him to buy 5\# potatoes, a
+ half gallon of 2\% milk and two packages of M\&Ms.
+
+would result in:
+
+Mom sent Tommy to the store and told him to buy 5# potatoes, a half gallon of
+2% milk and two packages of M&Ms.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/spn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/spn.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8377cd9a4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/spn.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| setpagenumber |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\spnã%
+
+Parameters: ã|previous page numberã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \setpagenumber markup resets the page number of a paper. The first page
+of a document, commonly referred to as the title page, is treated as page
+number "1". You can begin the document with a page number other than 1, or
+renumber sections of the document.
+ The \setpagenumber markup can be specified anywhere in your document.
+It changes the number of the current page. This can be particularly useful
+if you are printing your document one part or chapter at a time.
+ To get pages in lower case roman numerals, for lead pages, enter a
+negative number, for instance \setpagenumber{-1}.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To set the page number so that the sentence beginning "Furthermore . . . "
+is on page 11, enter
+
+as shown in this series of figures.
+% insert four full-page figures
+\setpagenumber{10}
+\newpage
+Furthermore, there are too many physical
+similarities between human forms and earth forms
+to dismiss. Indeed, they are made of the same . . .
+
+ You could also have placed the \setpagenumber markup after the \newpage
+and changed the number from 10 to 11:
+
+as shown in this series of figures.
+% insert four full-page figures
+\newpage
+\setpagenumber{11}
+Furthermore, there are too many physical
+
+similarities between human forms and earth forms
+to dismiss. Indeed, they are made of the same . . .
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+To get pages in lower case roman numerals, for lead pages, enter a negative
+number, for instance \setpagenumber{-1}.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sptn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sptn.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fb40c3ae20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sptn.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| setpartnumber |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\sptnã%
+
+Parameters: ã|previous part numberã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The part number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of
+\part. The part number can be reset by inserting the \setpartnumber markup
+before the next occurrence of \part.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+By default, the first part is number 1. If you want to start with part 5,
+you would enter:
+
+\setpartnumber{4}
+\part{Title of the fifth part}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The number specified in the \setpartnumber parameter is the previous part
+number, not the next part number.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssan.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssan.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6b4085cc82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssan.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| setsubheadanumber |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\ssanã%
+
+Parameters: ã|previous subheada numberã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The subheada number will be automatically incremented by one for each
+use of \subheada. The subheada number can be reset by inserting the
+\setsubheadanumber markup before the next occurrence of \subheada.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+By default, the first subheada is number 1. If you want to start with
+number 5, you would enter:
+
+\setsubheadanumber{4}
+\subheada{Title of the fifth subheada}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The number specified in the \setsubheadanumber parameter is the previous
+subheada number, not the next subheada number.
+ The subheada number is reset to zero when you enter \part, \chapter or
+\appendix.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssbn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssbn.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..df728a0689
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssbn.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| setsubheadbnumber |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\ssbnã%
+
+Parameters: ã|previous subheadb numberã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The subheadb number will be automatically incremented by one for each
+use of \subheadb. The subheadb number can be reset by inserting the
+\setsubheadbnumber markup before the next occurrence of \subheadb.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+By default, the first subheadb is number 1. If you want to start with
+number 5, you would enter:
+
+\setsubheadbnumber{4}
+\subheadb{Title of the fifth subheadb}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The number specified in the \setsubheadbnumber parameter is the previous
+subheadb number, not the next subheadb number.
+ The subheadb number is reset to zero when you enter \part, \chapter,
+\subheada, or \appendix.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sscn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sscn.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c6db33d4e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sscn.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| setsubheadcnumber |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\sscnã%
+
+Parameters: ã|previous subheadc numberã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The subheadc number will be automatically incremented by one for each
+use of \subheadc. The subheadc number can be reset by inserting the
+\setsubheadcnumber markup before the next occurrence of \subheadc.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+By default, the first subheadc is number 1. If you want to start with
+number 5, you would enter:
+
+\setsubheadcnumber{4}
+\subheadc{Title of the fifth subheadc}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The number specified in the \setsubheadcnumber parameter is the previous
+subheadc number, not the next subheadc number.
+ The subheadc number is reset to zero when you enter \part, \chapter,
+\subheada, \subheadb, or \appendix.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssdn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssdn.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b93175860c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssdn.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| setsubheaddnumber |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\ssdnã%
+
+Parameters: ã|previous subheadd numberã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The subheadd number will be automatically incremented by one for each
+use of \subheadd. The subheadd number can be reset by inserting the
+\setsubheaddnumber markup before the next occurrence of \subheadd.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+By default, the first subheadd is number 1. If you want to start with
+number 5, you would enter:
+
+\setsubheaddnumber{4}
+\subheadd{Title of the fifth subheadd}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The number specified in the \setsubheaddnumber parameter is the previous
+subheadd number, not the next subheadd number.
+ The subheadd number is reset to zero when you enter \part, \chapter,
+\subheada, \subheadb, \subheadc, or \appendix.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1d7173e845
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| selectspecificfont |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\ssfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|catalog name, font size, leadingã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \selectspecificfont markup permits you to include fonts that are not
+members of sets or families, and have an \interlineskip associated with it.
+The format of this markup is,
+
+\selectspecificfont{catalog name}{font size}{leading}
+
+where catalog name is the system name for that font without the font size
+specification. (Complete lists of the catalog names can be found by going
+to the TEXT1 help menu, or by looking in the Font Catalogs.) The font
+size is the size in points of that face. The leading is the interlineskip
+
+specification. You cannot use "default" for the leading as you can with
+\selectfontset.
+ To access a specific font made available with \selectspecificfont, you
+enter a backslash, followed by the catalog name, followed by the font size,
+and ending with a semicolon.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example makes the Computer Modern Slanted font at 12 points available
+for use. After specifying,
+
+\selectspecificfont{cmsl}{12}{14pt}
+
+you would then enter "\cmsl12;" to use this font. For example,
+
+\selectspecificfont{cmsl}{12}{14pt}
+\twelvept
+\cl{\cmsl12; Nuclear Utopia}
+Nuclear war is unthinkable.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Nuclear Utopia |
+| Nuclear war is unthinkable. |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Each font specified with \selectspecificfont must be followed by a
+semicolon.
+ You cannot use "default" for the leading as you can with \selectfontset.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssp.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bb69c58d75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssp.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| singlespace |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\sspã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+Single spacing is the default for TEXT1. The \singlespace markup can
+be used to return to single spacing if the spacing has been changed
+double spacing with \doublespace. The markup \singlespace markup has no
+parameters, and causes an end-of-paragraph, forcing the following text into
+a new paragraph.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\doublespace
+The cultures of industrial nations are based on
+unethical accumulations of materials.
+This inequality is maintained by power, not
+persuasion.
+\singlespace
+Power politics makes problems that cannot be solved
+except by war.
+Questions about defining the best nation or the best
+religion lead to organized . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| The cultures of industrial nations are based on unethical |
+| |
+| accumulations of materials. This inequality is maintained by power, |
+| |
+| not persuasion. |
+| Power politics makes problems that cannot be solved except by war. |
+| Questions about defining the best nation or the best religion lead to |
+| organized . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The interline skip value used with \singlespace and \doublespace is set with
+the \interlineskip markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/stn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/stn.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..94fe79e895
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/stn.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| settablenumber |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\stnã%
+
+Parameters: ã|previous table numberã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The table number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of
+\tabletitle. The table number can be reset by adding the \settablenumber
+markup before the next occurrence of \tabletitle.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+By default, table numbers are reset in parts. If you also want them reset
+in chapters, you could modify the \chapterformat by adding \settablenumber
+to the \titleformat:
+
+\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber}
+
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle}
+ \vs{1\bl}
+ \settablenumber{0}
+ \setsubheadanumber{0}
+ \setsubheadbnumber{0}
+ \setsubheadcnumber{0}
+ \setsubheaddnumber{0}}
+ \incontents{yes} }
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The number specified in the \settablenumber parameter is the previous table
+number, not the next table number. If you want the next \tabletitle to be
+Table 90, then specify
+
+\settablenumber{89}
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/strut.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/strut.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..582344ae8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/strut.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| strut |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+There are times when it is necessary to have the baselineskip between two
+lines be the same, especially if you are building a table that uses rules
+between columns. The \strut markup can be used in an \halign to maintain
+consistent distance between lines of a table. The \strut markup has no
+parameters. Its height is 1.8 times the height of an "x" in the current
+point size. Its depth is .6 times the height of an "x" in the current point
+size.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Consider this table created without the use of \strut,
+
+\sfs{cm8}{eightpt}{default}
+
+\twelvept
+
+
+\tabletitle{Comparison of the composition of goat's
+milk and that of two common breeds of dairy cows}
+{\offinterlineskip\eightpt
+\halign{\vrule\hs{3pt}\lft{#}\hs{3pt}\vrule&&
+ \hs{3pt}\ctr{#}\hs{3pt}\vrule\cr
+\noalign{\hrule}
+&&\bd Total&&&\cr
+\bd Source of milk&\bd Water&\bd Solids&
+ \bd Fat&\bd Protein&\bd Lactose\cr
+\noalign{\hrule height 1pt}
+Goats&82.02\%&11.98\%&3.50\%&3.13\%&4.55\%\cr
+\noalign{\hrule}
+Holstein-Friesian&87.50\%&12.50\%&3.55\%&3.42\%&4.86\%\cr
+\noalign{\hrule}
+Jersey&85.31\%&14.69\%&5.18\%&3.86\%&4.94\%\cr
+\noalign{\hrule}
+
+}}
+\twelvept
+
+which prints as:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Table 1 |
+| Comparison of the composition of goat's milk and that of two common breeds |
+| of dairy cows |
+| ...................................................... |
+| ....................................................... |
+| ....................................................... |
+| .Jersey...........85.31%..14.69%5.18%..3.86%...4.94%... |
+| ...................................................... |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Now add \strut to the \halign preamble,
+
+\halign{\strut\vrule\hs{3pt}\lft{#}\hs{3pt}\vrule&&
+ \hs{3pt}\ctr{#}\hs{3pt}\vrule\cr
+
+and notice the uniform distance between lines:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Table 2 |
+| Comparison of the composition of goat's milk and that of two common breeds |
+| of dairy cows |
+| ...................................................... |
+| . . Total . . . . |
+| ....................................................... |
+| Goats 82.02%11.98% 3.50% 3.13% 4.55% |
+| ..Holstein-Friesia87.50%..12.50%3.55%..3.42%...4.86%.. |
+| ....................................................... |
+| ....................................................... |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The size of the strut changes as the interline skip changes. \twelvept will
+have a longer \strut than will \tenpt.
+ See The TEXbook for more on \offinterlineskip.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheada.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheada.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e7e95f9a4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheada.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|SUBHEADAã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\subheadaformat.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadb.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadb.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9504d6e77b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadb.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|SUBHEADBã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\subheadbformat.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadc.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadc.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9d092ec196
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadc.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|SUBHEADCã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\subheadcformat.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadd.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadd.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..92786990ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadd.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|SUBHEADDã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\subheadDformat.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sy.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sy.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1cd81220f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sy.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| symbol |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\syã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \symbol markup sets the face to the Computer Modern Math Symbol face.
+Refer to The TEXbook, Appendix F, for a complete list of the characters
+available in the Symbol face.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+This example uses \symbol to print a diagonal arrow:
+
+Put a {\symbol\char'45} next to . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Put a \ next to . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+For more on the use of the \char markup, refer to The TEXbook.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablem.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..81d335148d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablem.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|TABLE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\tableformat. This is to be used when you are using \monospace.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablep.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..292d726559
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablep.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|TABLE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\tableformat. This is to be used when you areã|notã%using \monospace.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/taf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/taf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..afa15b556b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/taf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| tableformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\tafã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\titleformat, \incontentsã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \tableformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that control the
+appearance of the table title.
+
+ã|titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% controls the appearance of the table title.
+You may use markup such as \blockquotebegin, \hangingparagraph, \vertical-
+space, and \centerline within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup
+you may use within or outside of \tableformat:
+ ã|tablenumber.ã% prints the most recent table number.
+ ã|tabletitle.ã% prints the most recent table title.
+
+ã|incontentsã% places the table title in contents (if one is printed).
+Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no."
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted a table title to print in a hanging paragraph style, and you
+didn't want the table title put in the table of contents, enter:
+
+\tableformat{%
+ \titleformat{\bqb\hp\bd Table \tablenumber.
+ \rm\tabletitle\bqe}
+ \incontents{yes}
+ }
+
+\tabletitle{Size data of a Yellow
+Transparent fruit during the period of July 23 to August 9,
+1977. (fruit No. IV@_b@)}
+\halign{\qquad\ctr{#}&&\hs{1em}\ctr{#}\cr
+July 23&July 27&July 31&August 5&August 9\cr
+32&67&44&47&18\cr}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| Table 1. Size data of a Yellow Transparent fruit during the |
+| period of July 23 to August 9, 1977. (fruit No. IV[b]) |
+| |
+| July 23 July 27 July 31 August 5 August 9 |
+| 32 67 44 47 18 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \tableformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are
+used. If you are using \monospace, the only difference in defaults is that
+the table title is printed in the \monospace font instead of \twelvept.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/talaris.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/talaris.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b6d310e084
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/talaris.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|TALARISã%block is to be selected if you want to change the default
+proportional space fonts and you are using a Talaris.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tat.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tat.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d5f13ab97a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tat.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| tabletitle |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\tatã%
+
+Parameters: ã|title textã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+A table is a presentation of information in columns. The \tabletitle markup
+centers the title and puts that title in the table of contents. The
+\tabletitle markup does not print the actual table, you must use \halign or
+\settabs to accomplish that.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\tabletitle{Monthly Salaries in Public Libraries\lbr
+for 1981}
+\tenpt
+\halign{\quad\lft{#}&&\quad\ctr{#}\cr
+\noalign{\hrule\vs{3pt}}
+
+&&\ctr{\bd Library Aide}&\ctr{\bd Page}\cr
+\omit\ctr{\bd City/Town}&\ctr{\bd Librarian}&
+ \ctr{\bd and Clerical}&\ctr{\bd and}\cr
+\omit\ctr{\bd Libraries}&\ctr{\bd (a)(b)}&
+ \ctr{\bd Assistant}&\ctr{\bd Bookbinder}\cr
+Brewster&190&---&---\cr
+Burlington&1158&5.89 hr&3.35/3.50 hr\cr
+Castle Rock&300&3.35 hr&---\cr
+Cathlamet&225&---&---\cr
+Chewelah&290&---&---\cr
+Cle Elum&3.50 hr&---&---\cr
+Colville&5.68 hr&5.00 hr&---\cr
+}
+
+which prints the table illustrated on the following page.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Table 1 |
+| Monthly Salaries in Public Libraries |
+| for 1981 |
+|.............................................................................|
+| Library Aide Page |
+| City/Town Librarian and Clerical and |
+| Libraries (a)(b) Assistant Bookbinder |
+| Brewster 190 --- --- |
+| Burlington 1158 5.89 hr 3.35/3.50 hr |
+| Castle Rock 300 3.35 hr --- |
+| Cathlamet 225 --- --- |
+| Chewelah 290 --- --- |
+| Cle Elum 3.50 hr --- --- |
+| Colville 5.68 hr 5.00 hr --- |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+\tabletitle only prints the table title in the text and places the title
+in the table of contents. Use \halign or \settabs to construct the table
+itself.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tenpt.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tenpt.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0ee2d7e6b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tenpt.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| tenpt |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+There are two default \selectfontsets established when you format a TEXT1
+file: \twelvept for the 12 point size Computer Modern serif typestyle; and
+\tenpt for the 10 point Computer Modern serif typestyle.
+ The font set includes the following nine faces, each of which is called
+by adding a backslash in front of the name, or using the abbreviation:
+\roman (\rm), \bold (\bd), \italic (\it), \typewriter (\tt), \caps (\cc),
+\mathitalic (\mi), \symbol (\sy), \extension (\ex), and \bolditalic (\bi).
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Consider this example for switching from 12 point to a 10 point size.
+
+\tenpt
+\centerline{\twelvept\bd Sociogeology}
+\centerline{\it by Achilles Chert}
+"Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus,
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Sociogeology |
+| by Achilles Chert |
+| "Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+There are some markup, such as \figure, \blockquotebegin, \autoendnote, and
+\autofootnote which use \tenpt in formatting. If you decide you want to use
+another 10 point font set (like Plantin) instead of Computer Modern as the
+default, you must give that set the same name, "tenpt":
+
+\selectfontset{pl10}{tenpt}{default}
+\selectfontset{pl12}{twelvept}{default}
+\selectmathset{cg97m}{mathdefault}
+\tenpt
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/text1.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/text1.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cfb0983202
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/text1.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| text1 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+You can print the name of the TEXT1 system by entering the markup \text1.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\appendix{\text1\ Markup}
+Following is the list of markup for \text1.
+\twc
+\aib
+appendix
+asisbegin
+asisend
+\aie
+\oc
+
+will print an appendix that looks like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 2 |
+| |
+| Appendix A |
+| TEXT1 Markup |
+| Following is the list of markup for TEXT1. |
+| |
+| appendix |
+| asisbegin |
+| asisend |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+You must follow \text1 with a required space (either a tilde ~ or with
+a backslash-space, if you want a space following \text1 as indicated in
+the example above in the \appendix markup. If you do not need a space
+following, such as at the end of the sentence illustrated in the second line
+of the example above beginning "Following is . . . ", then omit the space.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thc.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dc34bb186e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thc.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| threecolumns |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\thcã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \threecolumns markup formats text in three identical width columns.
+Column widths, gutters and margins are calculated automatically. The
+default column width is 31% of the galleywidth (hsize). The default gutter
+between each column is 3.5% of the galleywidth.
+ The Flexible format (the default) allows the user to use single column,
+two column, and three column text interchangeably on the current page by
+entering one of the markup choices at the desired point in the text. The
+flexible format will balance the text columns whenever the number of columns
+changes.
+ For example, if the author changes the multiple column format by
+typing a different markup TEXT1 will automatically balance the columns it
+is currently processing and change to a new number of columns. These
+instructions can be inserted at any point on the page.
+ The author may want to handle tables and other large blocks of text by
+returning to a single column for the table by typing \onecolumn immediately
+before the table and returning to two or three column formatting immediately
+after the table.
+ All running head, running foot, and inserts are printed across the
+full single column width that prints across the top of the current page.
+Footnotes will be printed across the full width at the bottom of the page.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\threecolumns
+\nin Hebrew is called a Semitic language because it has
+its roots in Shem, one of the sons of Noah.
+Viewing Jerusalem as its center, it is related to the
+northern, rougher Aramaic, and to the southern, more
+polished Arabic. It has a freshness, simplicity and
+power that few modern languages possess. Bounds of the
+ancient Semitic tongue were approximately the
+Mediterranean Sea on the west, the Euphrates and Tigris
+Rivers on the easy, the mountains
+of Armenia on the north,
+and the coast of Arabia on the south. Consider the first
+character, N . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Hebrew is rougher approximately. |
+| called Aramaic, the Mediter- |
+| a Semitic and to the ranean Sea |
+| language southern, on the west, |
+| because more pol- the Euphrates. |
+| it has its ished Ara- and Tigris |
+| roots in bic. It Rivers on |
+| Shem, one has a the easy, |
+| of the sons freshness, sim- the mountains. |
+| of Noah. plicity and of Armenia |
+| Viewing power that on the north,. |
+| Jerusalem few modern and the coast. |
+| as its cen- languages pos Arabia on |
+| ter, it is sess. Bounds the south. |
+| related to of the an- Consider the |
+| the north- cient Semitic first char- |
+| ern, tongue were acter, N |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+To change the column width or the gutter width, use the \multicolumnformat
+markup.
+ You cannot specify \threecolumns inside of \vbox, \drawbox,
+\paragraphbox, or a floating \figure (non floating figures, \nofloat,
+are ok).
+ If you want footnotes and figures to print in one column instead of
+across both columns, use the \fixedformat markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thesis.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thesis.helpmode
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5d43b13234
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thesis.helpmode
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|THESISã%model is a thesis model set up to abide by all of the WSU
+graduate school's rules. It is a template. You may modify it, but
+it is recommended you check with the Information Center first.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/titlepg.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/titlepg.helpbloc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dd15e332b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/titlepg.helpbloc
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Theã|TITLEPGã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the
+\titlepageformat for changing the way a title page is printed.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toc.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dd9d895ec7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toc.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| tableofcontents |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\tocã%
+
+Parameters: ã|page numberã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \tableofcontents markup prints the table of contents, beginning with
+the designated page. A roman numeral page number is specified by entering
+a negative page number. This markup must always appear at the end of a
+document.
+ By default, parts, chapters, appendices and subheading levels "A" and
+"B" are included in the table of contents. The order of printing in the
+table of contents is always
+ 1. table of contents
+ 2. list of figures
+ 3. list of tables
+ The list of figures will print only if a \figure markup was used. The
+list of tables will print only if a \tabletitle markup was used.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To print the table of contents beginning on page 32 enter:
+of utmost importance.
+\tableofcontents{32}
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted the table of contents to begin on roman numeral page three
+("iii"), you would enter a minus three.
+
+New York: Halstead Press.
+\tableofcontents{-3}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+This markup must always appear at the end of a document.
+ Multiple line titles may be broken in the table of contents by using
+\toclinebreak.
+
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tocf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tocf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f178e50e3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tocf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,478 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| tableofcontentsformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\tocfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã| \toctitle, \prefacetocformat, \parttocformat,
+\continuechapter, \chaptertocformat,
+\hangingchapterindent, \appendixtocformat,
+\hangingappendixindent, \subheadatocformat,
+\subheadbtocformat, \subheadctocformat,
+\subheaddtocformat, \bibliographytocformat,
+\figuretoctitle, \figuretocformat,
+\hangingfigureindent, \tabletoctitle,
+\tabletocformat, \hangingtableindentã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The table of contents prints with the titles "Table of Contents", "List of
+Figures", and "List of Tables" centered in bold letters and each beginning
+
+on a new page. If you want to change these defaults you use the \table-
+ofcontentsformat markup. This markup also changes the way part, chapter,
+subhead, appendix, bibliography, preface, figure and table titles print in
+table of contents.
+
+ã|toctitleã% regulates how the table of contents title is to be printed. By
+default it is a centered bold title "Table of Contents". Use \toctitle to
+change this default.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted the title of the table of contents to print "Contents" you
+would enter:
+
+\tableofcontentsformat{
+ \toctitle{\cl{\it Contents}}}
+
+ã|prefacetocformatã% determines how titles entered on the \preface markup
+are to print in the table of contents. By default, they are simply printed
+with a \noindent.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted the preface title to print in italics as illustrated on the
+next page, you would enter:
+
+\tocf{\prefacetocformat{\nin\it
+ \prefacetitle\leader\pn}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|parttocformatã% determines how titles entered on the \part markup are to
+print in the table of contents. By default, part titles skip one line,
+center the part number, center the part title, skip another line, then print
+"Part" followed by the part number again, followed by leader and the page
+number:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Part 1 |
+| Mechanics |
+| |
+| Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+If you wanted parts to print in a hanging paragraph style, enter:
+
+\tocf{\parttocformat{\hp\parttitle\leader\pn}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Videodiscs in today's modern office --- Timely |
+| TV Tutors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|continuechapterã% if specified as "yes" will print "Chapter" at the top of
+each page under the header. The default is "no".
+
+ã|chaptertocformat{Nested Markup}ã% determines how a chapter title is to be
+printed in the table of contents. By default, the chapter number and title
+are printed in a hanging number style. For example, if you entered,
+
+\chapter{The Nineteenth Century and after\lbr
+best-sellers\toclbr and steady-sellers}
+
+you would get in the table of contents:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 1. The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers |
+| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Note that the line break from \lbr only occurs in the text, not in the
+table of contents. Use \toclbr to create a line break which is to occur
+in the table of contents. To change the amount of indent, use the
+\hangingchapterindent. You may use markup such as \newpage, \chaptertitle,
+\chapternumber, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \chaptertocformat as
+Nested Markup. You may also use \hangingchapternumber, which prints the
+chapter number in a similar fashion as \item.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted chapter titles to print in a hanging paragraph style, without
+an associated chapter number, you would enter:
+
+\tocf{\chaptertocformat{\hp\chaptertitle\leader\pn}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers |
+| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you want the title "Chapter" to appear left justified in the table of
+contents above the first chapter number, prior to the first chapter you
+would enter the following \putincontents markup:
+
+\putincontents1{\nin Chapter}
+\chapter{First Chapter}
+Text of the first chapter . . .
+
+which prints in the table of contents as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Chapter |
+| 1. First Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|hangingchapterindentã% controls the amount of indent before printing the
+chapter title when you print using \hangingchapternumber.
+
+ã|appendixtocformat{Nested Markup}ã% determines how an appendix title is to
+be printed in the table of contents. By default, the appendix number and
+title are printed in a hanging number style. For example, if you entered,
+
+\appendix{The Nineteenth Century and after\lbr
+best-sellers\toclbr and steady-sellers}
+
+you would get in the table of contents:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| A. The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers |
+| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Note that the line break from \lbr only occurs in the text, not in
+the table of contents. Use \toclbr to create a line break which
+is to occur in the table of contents. To change the amount of
+indent, use the \hangingappendixindent. You may use markup such as
+\newpage, \appendixtitle, \appendixnumber, \verticalspace, and \center-
+line within \appendixtocformat as Nested Markup. You may also use
+\hangingappendixnumber, which prints the chapter number in a similar fashion
+as \item.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted appendix titles to print in a hanging paragraph style, without
+an associated appendix number, you would enter:
+
+\tocf{\appendixtocformat{\hp\appendixtitle\leader\pn}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers |
+| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you want the title "Appendix" to appear left justified in the table of
+contents above the first appendix number, prior to the first appendix you
+would enter the following \putincontents markup:
+
+\putincontents1{\nin Appendix}
+\appendix{First Appendix}
+Text of the first appendix . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Appendix |
+| A. First Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|hangingappendixindentã% controls the amount of indent before printing the
+appendix title when you print using \hangingappendixnumber.
+
+ã|subheadatocformatã% by default prints all titles entered with \subheada to
+be block indented 1/2 inch from the left margin. Use \subheadatocformat to
+change this default.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Chapter |
+| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 |
+| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They don't quite |
+| make it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To have subheada titles indented 1/4inch and printed with a hangingindent,
+enter:
+
+\tocf{\subheadatocformat{\leftindent{.25in}
+ \hp\subheadatitle \leader \pagenumber}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Chapter |
+| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 |
+| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They don't quite make |
+| it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|subheadbtocformatã% by default prints all titles entered with \subheadb to
+be block indented 1 inch from the left margin. Use \subheadbtocformat to
+change the default illustrated here:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Chapter |
+| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 |
+| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They don't |
+| quite make it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To have subheadb titles indented /4 inch and printed with a hangingindent
+prefaced with "cc.aa.bb" where cc is the chapter number, aa is the subheada
+number and bb is the subheadb number, enter:
+
+ \tocf{\subheadbtocformat{\leftindent{.25in}
+ \hp\chapternumber.\subheadanumber.\subheadbnumber
+ \quad\subheadbtitle \leader \pagenumber}}
+
+ The first \subheadb in the second \subheada of the first chapter would
+print in the table of contents as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Chapter |
+| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 |
+| 1.2.1 Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They |
+| don't quite make it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|subheadctocformatã% by default prints all titles entered with \subheadc to
+be block indented 11/2inch from the left margin. Use \subheadctocformat to
+change this default.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| Chapter |
+| 1. Document Exchange .. . ...... . .. .. .. . ...... . .. .. .. . .....15 |
+| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They |
+| don't quite make it yet .... . . ..... . . ..... . . ....15 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To have subheadc titles indented 3/4inch and printed in italics, enter:
+
+\tocf{\subheadctocformat{\leftindent{.75in}
+ \nin\italic
+ \subheadctitle \leader \pagenumber}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Chapter |
+| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 |
+| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They don't |
+| quite make it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|subheaddtocformatã% by default prints all titles entered with \subheadd to
+be block indented 2 inches from the left margin. Use \subheaddtocformat to
+change this default.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Chapter |
+| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 |
+| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: |
+| They don't quite make |
+| it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+To have subheadd titles indented 2 inches, printed with a hangingindent in a
+10 point Computer Modern italic font, and no page number, enter:
+
+\tocf{\subheadatocformat{\leftindent{2in}
+ \hp\tenpt\italic
+ \subheaddtitle}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Chapter |
+| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 |
+| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: |
+| They don't quite make it yet |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|bibliographytocformatã% determines how titles entered on the \bibliography
+markup are to print in the table of contents. By default, they are simply
+printed with a \noindent like prefaces. Use \bibliographytocformat to
+change this default.
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted the preface title to print in bold, you would enter:
+
+\tocf{\bibliographytocformat{\nin\bold
+ \bibtitle\leader\pn}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| ã|Bibliographyã%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|figuretoctitleã% determines how the list of figures is to print. By
+default, it will start a new page, center the title "List of Figures", and
+then print a header above the first figure, which in the example below had
+the title "Hot times . . . " and printed on page 43:
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 21 |
+| List of Figures |
+| Figure Page |
+| 1. Hot times in the land of the midnight sun . . . . . . . . . . . 43 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted the list of figures to print the title "Illustrations" instead
+of "List of Figures" after skipping to a new page, enter
+
+\tocf{\figuretoctitle{\newpage
+ \cl{\bd Illustrations}
+ \line{Figure\rt{Page}}}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Illustrations |
+| Figure Page |
+| 1. Hot times in the land of the midnight sun ... . ... ... . .....43 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|figuretocformat{Nested Markup}ã% determines how a figure title is to be
+printed in the table of contents. By default, the figure number and title
+are printed in a hanging number style. For example, if you entered:
+
+\figure{\halfpage}{The Nineteenth Century
+and after best-sellers\toclbr and steady-sellers}
+the figure title would print in the contents as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 1. The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers |
+| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ To change the amount of indent, use the \hangingfigureindent. You may
+use markup such as \figuretitle and \figurenumber, within \figuretocformat
+as Nested Markup. You may also use \hangingnumber{\figurenumber} which
+prints the figure number in a similar fashion as \item.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted figure titles to print in a hanging paragraph style prefaced
+with the figure number, you would enter:
+
+\tocf{\figuretocformat{\hp
+ \figurenumber\quad\figuretitle\leader\pn}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 1 The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers |
+| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|hangingfigureindentã% controls the amount of indent before printing the
+figure title when you print using:
+
+\hangingnumber{\figurenumber}
+
+ã|tabletoctitleã% determines how the list of tables is to print. By
+default, it will start a new page, center the title "List of Tables ", and
+then print a header above the first table, which in the example below had
+the title "Hot times . . . " and printed on page 55:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| List of Tables |
+| Table Page |
+| 1. Hot times in the land of the midnight sun . . . . . . . . . . . 55 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted the list of tables to print the title "Tables" after skipping
+to a new page, enter
+
+\tocf{\tabletoctitle{\newpage
+ \cl{\bd Tables}
+ \line{Table\rt{Page}}}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Tables |
+| Table Page |
+| 1. Hot times in the land of the midnight sun . . . . . . . . . . . 55 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|tabletocformat{Nested Markup}ã% determines how a table title is to be
+printed in the table of contents. By default, the table number and title
+are printed in a hanging number style. For example, if you entered:
+
+\tabletitle{The Nineteenth Century
+and after best-sellers\toclbr and steady-sellers}
+the table title would print as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 1. The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers |
+| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ To change the amount of indent, use the \hangingtableindent. You may
+use markup such as \tabletitle and \tablenumber, within \tabletocformat as
+Nested Markup. You may also use \hangingnumber{\tablenumber}, which prints
+the table number in a similar fashion as \item.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you wanted table titles to print in a hanging paragraph style prefaced
+with "cc.tt" where cc is the chapter number and tt is the table number, you
+would enter,
+
+\tocf{\tabletocformat{\hp\chapternumber.\tablenumber
+ \quad\tabletitle\leader\pn}}
+
+and the first table of the second chapter would print in the contents as:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 2.1 The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers |
+| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ã|hangingtableindentã% controls the amount of indent before printing the
+table title when you print using:
+
+\hangingnumber{\tablenumber}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+The \tableofcontentsformat markup should always appear at the top of a
+document, but after \monospace, if both are used.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toclbr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toclbr.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b7503bd102
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toclbr.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| toclinebreak |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\toclbrã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \toclinebreak markup causes a line to finish without interrupting a
+paragraph in the table of contents. Occasionally it is necessary to break
+a line in a precise place within a paragraph, as opposed to letting TEXT1
+decide where to break the line. This markup does not end a paragraph, it
+simply starts the following text of the paragraph on a new line in the table
+of contents instead of concatenating it to the end of the previous line.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\chapter{More facts about Datapoint
+information\toclbr processing\linebreak
+ and office
+automation products,\lbr\toclbr
+systems, and software}
+
+will print the chapter title on three lines in the text of the document:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| More facts about Datapoint information processing |
+| and office automation products, |
+| systems, and software |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+and on three lines in the table of contents:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| 1. More facts about Datapoint information |
+| processing and office automation products, |
+| systems, and software . . . .... . . ...... . . .... . . ...... . . 32 |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/today.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/today.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3d9a1bd87c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/today.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| today |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \today markup prints the current date in a standard format, "month day,
+year".
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\rightlinesbegin
+John R. Bays
+Philosophy 484
+\today
+\rightlinesend
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| John R. Bays |
+| Philosophy 484 |
+| January 15, 1987 |
+| |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpeven b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpeven
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a839ce01d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpeven
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \topline1-5 COMMANDS |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \topline1-5 commands set what will appear at the top of each page after the
+title page. The \topline1-5 command is always used in conjunction with the
+\bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op) command. This command
+has the format:
+
+ \evenpages{
+ \toplineX{llll}{cccc}{rrrr}
+ }
+
+where "X" may be 1-5 and refers to the toptitle line number; "llll" is the
+information to be printed left justified; "cccc" is the information to be
+printed centered; and "rrrr" is the information to be printed right justified.
+For example:
+
+ \evenpages{
+ \topline1{Joe Smith}{June 3, 1984}{\pagenumber}
+ \topline2{\rule}{}{}
+ }
+
+will space down the amount specified on the \topmargin command and put "Joe
+Smith" at the top far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the current page
+number on the top far right of the first line of each even page. On the second
+line of each even page will be a horizontal line across the width of the text.
+The running toptitle of page 4 would look like this:
+
+Joe Smith June 3, 1984 4
+_______________________________________________________________________________
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpoddp b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpoddp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..592dd44217
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpoddp
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \topline1-5 COMMANDS |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \topline1-5 commands set what will appear at the top of each page after the
+title page. The \topline1-5 command is always used in conjunction with the
+\bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op) command. This command
+has the format:
+
+ \oddpages{
+ \toplineX{llll}{cccc}{rrrr}
+ }
+
+where "X" may be 1-5 and refers to the toptitle line number; "llll" is the
+information to be printed left justified; "cccc" is the information to be
+printed centered; and "rrrr" is the information to be printed right justified.
+For example:
+
+ \oddpages{
+ \topline1{Joe Smith}{June 3, 1984}{\pagenumber}
+ \topline2{\rule}{}{}
+ }
+
+will space down the amount specified on the \topmargin command and put "Joe
+Smith" at the top far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the current page
+number on the top far right of the first line of each odd page. On the second
+line of each odd page will be a horizontal line across the width of the text.
+The running toptitle of page 5 would look like this:
+
+Joe Smith June 3, 1984 5
+_______________________________________________________________________________
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topmargi.helppage b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topmargi.helppage
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..407c650c62
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topmargi.helppage
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \topmargin (\tma) COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \topmargin (\tma) command will set the distance from the top of the page to
+the top of the running top title text. This command has the format:
+
+ \topmargin{uu}
+
+where "uu" is the unit of measurement in number of lines or in any valid TeX
+measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). The default top margin is one inch, or
+\topmargin{1IN}. This command may only appear at the beginning of the TeX input
+file before any actual text is entered.
+
+In order to change the top margin from the default of one inch to one-half
+inch, you would enter:
+
+ \tma{.5in}
+
+Which would give you one-half inch between the top of the page to the top of
+the running top title.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tp.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b0e3f5dc3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tp.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| titlepage |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\tpã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+By convention, a title page is a display page, differing from body pages.
+It usually has sinkage (extra vertical space before the title), a centered
+title (in bold or larger type), and a blind folio (where the page is
+numbered but the number is not printed). It may also have special text in
+the footing.
+ By default, the first page of any paper is a title page in TEXT1,
+although it can be suppressed by \notitlepage. Furthermore, title pages can
+be added anywhere in a paper using \titlepage. Since the title page usually
+receives different treatment from body pages, there is separate markup for
+it. By default, the title page adds 1 inch to the top margin and does not
+print a running foot line at the bottom of the page.
+ The next page after a title page in TEXT1 is always assumed to be a
+\notitlepage.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Some applications have more than one page in the document which are not
+to carry a running top title. For example, if you want a chapter to
+always print without a running top title, you could add \titlepage to the
+\chapterformat markup:
+
+\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1}
+ \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject
+ \titlepage
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber}
+ \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle}
+ \vs{1\bl}
+ \setsubheadanumber{0}
+ \setsubheadbnumber{0}
+ \setsubheadcnumber{0}
+ \setsubheaddnumber{0}}
+
+ \incontents{yes}}
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Use the \titlepageformat to change the defaults on the title page.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tpf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tpf.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..61299a89b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tpf.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| titlepageformat |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+\titlepageformat{\titleleadskip{1in}
+ \titlefootline{}
+ }
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\tpfã%
+
+Parameters: ã|submarkupã%
+
+Submarkup: ã|\titleleadskip, \titlefootlineã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+By convention, a title page is a display page, differing from body pages.
+It usually has sinkage (extra vertical space before the title), a centered
+title (in bold or larger type), and a blind folio (where the page is
+numbered but the number is not printed). It may also have special text in
+the footing. The \titlepageformat markup changes the heading and footing of
+a titlepage.
+
+ã|titleleadskipã% is the amount of space to be left at the top of title
+pages, in addition to the top margin. By default, there is a 1 inch lead
+skip and a 1 inch top margin, making for a 2 inch white space at the top of
+each title page.
+
+ã|titlefootlineã% is the footing at the bottom of a title page. Similar
+in function to the running foot, its difference is that you do not specify
+\bothpage, \evenpage, or \oddpage with \titlefootline.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+If you want to add 3 inches to the top margin, and print "Bays" at the
+bottom of the page with the page number, enter:
+
+\titlepageformat{\titleleadskip{3in}
+ \titlefootline{\line{\lft{Bays}\rt{\pn}}}
+ }
+
+which prints a footing at the bottom of the page like:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+| |
+| Bays 3 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tt.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tt.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..25af085df6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tt.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| typewriter |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\ttã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+Typewriter is a medium-weight uniformly spaced type face. You get this face
+when you enter \typewriter. Each character has the same width. It is handy
+in \asisbegin blocks.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Using the typewriter font,
+
+\asisbegin
+And yet not cloy thy lips 1
+ with loath'd satiety, 2
+But rather famish them 3
+
+ amid their plenty, 4
+\asisend
+
+you get the line number on the right to line up:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+| |
+| And yet not cloy thy lips 1 |
+| with loath'd satiety, 2 |
+| But rather famish them 3 |
+| amid their plenty, 4 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Without \typewriter you get:
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| And yet not cloy thy lips 1 |
+| with loath'd satiety, 2 |
+| But rather famish them 3 |
+| amid their plenty, 4 |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+none.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twc.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..eac46c836c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twc.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| twocolumns |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\twcã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \twocolumns markup formats text in two columns with identical width.
+The column widths and gutter are calculated automatically within the
+specified margins. The default width of both columns is 48% of the
+galleywidth. The default gutter width is 4% of the galleywidth.
+ The Flexible format allows the user to use single column, two column,
+and three column text interchangeably on the current page by entering one of
+the markup choices at the desired point in the text. The flexible format
+will balance the text columns whenever the number of columns changes.
+ For example, if the author changes the multiple column format by
+typing a different markup TEXT1 will automatically balance the columns it
+is currently processing and change to a new number of columns. These
+instructions can be inserted at any point on the page.
+ The author may want to handle tables and other large blocks of text by
+returning to a single column for the table by typing \onecolumn immediately
+before the table and returning to two or three column formatting immediately
+after the table.
+ All running head, running foot, and inserts are printed across the
+full single column width that prints across the top of the current page.
+Footnotes will be printed across the full width at the bottom of the page.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\twocolumns
+\nin Hebrew is called a Semitic language because it has
+its roots in Shem, one of the sons of Noah.
+Viewing Jerusalem as its center, it is related to the
+northern, rougher Aramaic, and to the southern, more
+polished Arabic. It has a freshness, simplicity and
+power that few modern languages possess. Bounds of the
+ancient Semitic tongue were approximately the
+Mediterranean Sea on the west, the Euphrates and Tigris
+Rivers on the easy,
+the mountains of Armenia on the north,
+and the coast of Arabia on the south. Consider the first
+character, N . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Hebrew is called languages pos- |
+| a Semitic lan- sess. Bounds |
+| guage because it of the ancient |
+| has its roots Semitic tongue |
+| in Shem, one were approxi- |
+| of the sons of mately the Medi- |
+| Noah. View- terranean Sea on |
+| ing Jerusalem as the west, the |
+| its center, it Euphrates and |
+| is related to Tigris Rivers on |
+| the northern, the easy, the |
+| rougher Aramaic, mountains of Ar- |
+| and to the menia on the |
+| southern, more north, and the |
+| polished Arabic. coast of Ara- |
+| It has a fresh- bia on the |
+| ness, simplic- south. Consider |
+| ity and power the first char- |
+| that few modern acter, N . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+To change the column width or the gutter width, use the \multicolumnformat
+markup.
+ You cannot specify \twocolumns inside of \vbox, \drawbox, \paragraphbox,
+or a floating \figure (non floating figures, \nofloat, are ok).
+ If you want footnotes and figures to print in one column instead of
+across both columns, use the \fixedformat markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twelvept.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twelvept.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3a4cfcfd53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twelvept.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| twelvept |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|noneã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+There are two default \selectfontsets established when you format a TEXT1
+file: \twelvept for the 12 point size Computer Modern serif typestyle; and
+\tenpt for the 10 point Computer Modern serif typestyle.
+ The font set includes the following nine faces, each of which is called
+by adding a backslash in front of the name, or using the abbreviation:
+\roman (\rm), \bold (\bd), \italic (\it), \typewriter (\tt), \caps (\cc),
+\mathitalic (\mi), \symbol (\sy), \extension (\ex), and \bolditalic (\bi).
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+Consider this example for switching from 12 point to a 10 point size.
+
+\tenpt
+\centerline{\twelvept\bd Sociogeology}
+\centerline{\it by Achilles Chert}
+"Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus,
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Sociogeology |
+| by Achilles Chert |
+| "Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+There are some markup, such as \tableformat, \runningheadformat, \run-
+ningfootformat, \chapterformat, \partformat and the other heading markup.
+If you want to use another 12 point font set (like Plantin) as the
+default instead of Computer Modern, you must give that set the same name,
+"twelvept":
+
+\selectfontset{pl10}{tenpt}{default}
+\selectfontset{pl12}{twelvept}{default}
+\selectmathset{cg97m}{mathdefault}
+\twelvept
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/us.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/us.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..29e63f08f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/us.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| underscore |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\usã%
+
+Parameters: ã|textã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+Underscoring, drawing a line under words or sentences, is also used for
+emphasis and to indicate book titles.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+
+Figure 1 shows a schema borrowed from my previous
+book, \us{The} \us{Intact} \us{Societies:}
+\us{Vestals} \us{and} \us{Volcanos}
+\us{in} \us{the} \us{South Pacific}, which suggests . . .
+ff
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| Figure 1 shows a schema borrowed from my previous book, The Intact |
+| Societies: Vestals and Volcanos in the South Pacific, which suggests |
+| . . . |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+In proportional spacing, the \underscore markup has the occasional
+disadvantage of preventing hyphenation and line breaking, which can result
+in awkward or impossible interword spacing and line breaks. To remedy this,
+put each word to be underscored inside of its own \underscore markup as
+illustrated above.
+ Do not use \underscore in math mode; use \underline instead.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vbox.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vbox.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..981ddf97ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vbox.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| vbox |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|box materialã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \vbox markup has many uses. One use is to be able to put multiple lines
+into a \drawbox markup.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\drawbox{\vbox{The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena
+is the research arm of Giga Geologicals,
+Inc. No apologies
+are tendered for the nonverifiability of experiments.
+The opinions of the authors do not reflect
+company policy.}}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| ........................................................................... |
+| . The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm of Gig . |
+| . Geologicals, Inc. No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of . |
+| . experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy. . |
+| ........................................................................... |
+| |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+.
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vertical.helpvert b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vertical.helpvert
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..872fadaa4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vertical.helpvert
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \verticalspace (\vs) COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \verticalspace (\vs) command will leave the specified amount of space or
+the specified number of blank lines in the text. This command will also force
+the following text into a new paragraph. The format for the \verticalspace
+(\vs) command is:
+
+ \verticalspace{x}
+
+Where "x" is the number of blank lines or space you wish to leave. For
+example,
+
+ \verticalspace{4\bl}
+
+will leave four blank lines, and
+
+ \verticalspace{2in}
+
+will leave two inches of blank space.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vrule.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vrule.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..60e469f102
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vrule.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| vrule |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|noneã%
+
+Parameters: ã|dimensionã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \vrule markup draws a vertical rule. It is a native TEX markup, and
+the usage is different in that the parameter is not surrounded with curly
+braces. If you do not supply a dimension, TEXT1 will print the rule with
+a height of the highest character in that line and the depth of the deepest
+character in that line. By default, the rule drawn has a thickness (width)
+of .4pt.
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+Refer to The TEXbook for more on \vrule and how to use the "depth" parameter
+with the "height" and "width" parameters.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vs.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fb1a1cc8f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vs.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| verticalspace |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\vsã%
+
+Parameters: ã|units of measureã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \verticalspace markup creates blank lines (or space) on a page. This
+markup causes a break in text and leaves a specified amount of space within
+a page. Any following text starts a new paragraph. The total amount of
+white space left is the units of measure (dimension) in the \verticalspace,
+plus the current paragraph skip value. This markup is followed by a
+parameter, which can be entered in whole blank lines, inches, points, or
+other valid units of measure.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\verticalspace{24pt}
+
+{\bd Minerals and Human Behavior}
+\verticalspace{1\bl}
+"Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert
+Camus, a novelist who lionized the labors of . . .
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| Minerals and Human Behavior |
+| |
+| "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, a novelist who |
+| lionized the labors of . . . |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+You can tell TEXT1 you want a variable amount of white space between lines
+by entering something line:
+
+\verticalspace{10pt plus 2pt minus 1pt}
+
+which tells TEXT1 you want 10 points of white space in addition to the
+paragraph skip. If TEXT1 cannot balance text to the bottom of the page
+when \normalbottom is in effect (which is the default), then the above
+specification allows TEXT1 to add up to 2 points of white space or subtract
+up to 1 point of white space from the 10 points of white space.
+ If you enter a \verticalspace markup at the top of a page it will be
+ignored. Putting a \verticalspace at the bottom of a page is risky, also,
+if the amount of space left on the page is less than the amount asked for.
+The difference will not be carried over to the following page; it will be
+lost. Both difficulties can be resolved by using a required space markup,
+\verticalspacekeep.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vsk.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vsk.helpmark
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..12befa9880
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vsk.helpmark
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| verticalspacekeep |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Abbreviation: ã|\vskã%
+
+Parameters: ã|units of measureã%
+
+ ã|Description:ã%
+The \verticalspacekeep markup leaves a required amount of space, for a
+figure, plate, or table. The space will always be kept together on
+the current page or printed at the top of the next page if not enough
+space remains on the current page. Text that follows a \verticalspacekeep
+will not be used to fill in the current page if the required space is
+moved to the following page. The amount of white space left is the
+\verticalspacekeep dimension plus the current paragraph skip value.
+
+ ã|Example:ã%
+\verticalspacekeep{2in}
+
+{\bd Sociogeology}
+{\it Minerals and Human Behavior}
+
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| |
+| Sociogeology Minerals and Human Behavior |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ã|Notes:ã%
+
+\verticalspacekeep is the best way to have white space left at the top of a
+page. \verticalspace will not leave white space at the top of a page.
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/width.helppage b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/width.helppage
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ec89a93efc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/width.helppage
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| TEXT1 \width COMMAND |
++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+The \width command specifies the width of the page that will be used for
+printing the file. The format is:
+
+ \width{uu}
+
+where "uu" is the unit of measurement in any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in,
+etc.) or number of 10-pitch characters. The default page width is 8.5 inches,
+or \width{8.5IN}. This command may only appear at the beginning of the TeX
+input file before any actual text is entered.